CONTENTS... 2002 DP-1X Chassis Projection Television Information INSTRUCTOR… Alvie Rodgers C.E.T. (Chamblee, GA.) MARCH 2006 Training Materials Prepared by: ALVIE RODGERS C.E.T. 2001 MODEL RELEASE DIGITAL HD READY PTV Chassis Model # Aspect DP-14G 43UWX10B 16X9 53UWX10B 61UWX10B DP-15 53UDX10B 4X3 61UDX10B DP-15E 43FDX10B 4X3 43FDX11B DP-17 53SWX10B 16X9 61SWX10B 53SWX12B Regional 61SWX12B Regional Anti-Glare Ultra Shield Included
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
CONTENTS... 2002 DP-1X Chassis Projection Television Information
INSTRUCTOR… Alvie Rodgers C.E.T. (Chamblee, GA.)
MARCH 2006 Training Materials Prepared by: ALVIE RODGERS C.E.T.
2001 MODEL RELEASE
DIGITAL
HD READY PTV Chassis Model # Aspect DP-14G 43UWX10B 16X9 53UWX10B 61UWX10B DP-15 53UDX10B 4X3 61UDX10B DP-15E 43FDX10B 4X3 43FDX11B DP-17 53SWX10B 16X9 61SWX10B 53SWX12B Regional 61SWX12B Regional Anti-Glare Ultra Shield Included
Alvie W Rodgers
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
SECTION (1) MICROPROCESSOR INFORMATION: • Microprocessor DATA COMMUNICATION Explanation ------------------------------------- 01-01 • Microprocessor with SRS DATA COMMUNICATION Circuit Diagram -------------------- 01-05 • Microprocessor with DSP DATA COMMUNICATION Circuit Diagram -------------------- 01-06 • DAC 1 and DAC 3 (I006 & I007) Pin Function Explanation ----------------------------------- 01-07 • On Screen Display OSD Signal Path Explanation ------------------------------------------------- 01-08 • On Screen Display OSD Signal Path Circuit Diagram --------------------------------------------- 01-10 • Audio and Video MUTE Explanation --------------------------------------------------------------- 01-11 • Audio and Video MUTE SRS Circuit Diagram ---------------------------------------------------- 01-13 • Audio and Video MUTE DSP Circuit Diagram ---------------------------------------------------- 01-14 • SRS PWB MUTE Circuit Diagram ------------------------------------------------------------------ 01-15 • DP-17 SURROUND PWB MUTE Circuit Diagram --------------------------------------------- 01-16 • MEMORY INITIALIZATION Explanation ------------------------------------------------------ 01-17 • FACTORY RESET CONDITIONS (Shipping Condition) ------------------------------------- 01-18 • EEPROM I2C Average Data Values ---------------------------------------------------------------- 01-20
SECTION (2) POWER SUPPLY DIAGRAMS: • POWER ON/OFF Explanation ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 02-01 • POWER ON/OFF DP-14G and DP-17 Circuit Diagram ---------------------------------------- 02-04 • POWER ON/OFF DP-15 Circuit Diagram --------------------------------------------------------- 02-05 • Sub Power Supply Distribution and Protection Block Diagram --------------------------------- 02-06 • Low Voltage Power Supply SHUT DOWN Explanation ----------------------------------------- 02-07 • Low Voltage Power Supply SHUT DOWN Diagram --------------------------------------------- 02-10 • Green LED Used in Low Voltage Power Supply for Visual Trouble Shooting Explanation 02-11 • Green LED Used in Low Voltage Power Supply for Visual Trouble Shooting ---------------- 02-12 • DP-17 Green LEDs Used in Low Voltage Power Supply Explanation ------------------------- 02-13 • DP-17 Green LEDs Used in Low Voltage Power Supply for Visual Trouble Shooting ------ 02-14 • Deflection Power Supply Distribution and Protection Block Diagram ------------------------- 02-15 • High Voltage Power Supply SHUT DOWN Explanation ---------------------------------------- 02-16 • High Voltage Power Supply SHUT DOWN Diagram -------------------------------------------- 02-21 • High Voltage Green and Red LED Used for Visual Trouble Shooting Explanation ---------- 02-22 • High Voltage Green and Red LED Used for Visual Trouble Shooting ------------------------- 02-24
SECTION (3) DEFLECTION CIRCUIT: • DEFLECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM Circuit Description -------------------------------------- 03-01 • DEFLECTION BLOCK DIAGRAM Circuit ---------------------------------------------------- 03-04 • HORIZONTAL DRIVE Circuit Description (Updated 04-2006) ------------------------------- 03-05 • HORIZONTAL DRIVE Circuit Diagram --------------------------------------------------------- 03-07 • HORIZONTAL DRIVE IC Voltages and Waveform Information --------------------------- 03-08 • Horizontal and Vertical SWEEP LOSS Detection Circuit Description ------------------------ 03-09 • Horizontal and Vertical SWEEP LOSS Detection Circuit --------------------------------------- 03-10 • Vertical SQUEEZE Display Diagrams -------------------------------------------------------------- 03-11 • Vertical SQUEEZE Circuit Diagram ---------------------------------------------------------------- 03-12 • VERTICAL OUTPUT with V. SQUEEZE Circuit ---------------------------------------------- 03-13 • DP-17 VERTICAL OUTPUT without V. SQUEEZE Circuit --------------------------------- 03-14 • SIDE PIN CUSHION Circuit Diagram ------------------------------------------------------------- 03-15
DP-1X CHASSIS Table of Contents Page 1 of 3 MARCH 2006
Continued on Next Page
Continued from Previous Page SECTION (4) DIGITAL CONVERGENCE CIRCUIT INFORMATION:
• DIGITAL CONVERGENCE Interface Circuit Description ------------------------------------- 04-01 • DIGITAL CONVERGENCE Interface Circuit Diagram ---------------------------------------- 04-05 • REMOTE CONTROL CLU-5711 in DIGITAL CONVERGENCE MODE ----------------- 04-06 • REMOTE CONTROL CLU-5712 in DIGITAL CONVERGENCE MODE ----------------- 04-07 • REMOTE CONTROL CLU-4311 in DIGITAL CONVERGENCE MODE ----------------- 04-08 • OVERLAY DIMENSIONS for 43” (4X3 Aspect) Models -------------------------------------- 04-09 • OVERLAY DIMENSIONS for 53” (4X3 Aspect) Model --------------------------------------- 04-10 • OVERLAY DIMENSIONS for 61” (4X3 Aspect) Model --------------------------------------- 04-11 • OVERLAY DIMENSIONS for 43” & 53” (16X9 Aspect) Model ------------------------------ 04-12 • OVERLAY DIMENSIONS for 61” (16X9 Aspect) Model -------------------------------------- 04-13 • OVERLAY Part Numbers ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 04-14
SECTION (5) VIDEO CIRCUIT INFORMATION:
• VIDEO Signal NTSC Circuit Diagram (1 of 2) -------------------------------------------------- 05-01 • VIDEO Signal NTSC, COMPONENT, and OSD Circuit Diagram (2 of 2) ---------------- 05-02 • IC-01 Pin 17, 24 and 52 Signal Description ------------------------------------------------------ 05-03 • Auto Brightness Limiter ABL Description ------------------------------------------------------ 05-04 • Auto Brightness Limiter ABL Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------- 05-05 • NTSC SYNC Circuit Diagram ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 05-06 • COMPONENT SYNC SEPARATION Circuit Diagram -------------------------------------- 05-07
SECTION (6) ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION:
• ADJUSTMENT ORDER ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 06-01 • PRE HEAT RUN -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 06-02 • CUT OFF ADJUSTMENT -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 06-03 • PRE-FOCUS ADJUSTMENT ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 06-04 • DCU CROSS HATCH PHASE SETTING ------------------------------------------------------- 06-05 • HORIZONTAL POSITION (COARSE) ADJUSTMENT ------------------------------------ 06-06 • RASTER TILT ADJUSTMENT ------------------------------------------------------------------- 06-07 • BEAM ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT ----------------------------------------------------------- 06-08 • RASTER POSITION [Off-Set for Red and Blue] ADJUSTMENT ------------------------- 06-09 • VERTICAL SIZE ADJUSTMENT ---------------------------------------------------------------- 06-10 • HORIZONTAL SIZE ADJUSTMENT ----------------------------------------------------------- 06-11 • BEAM FORM ADJUSTMENT -------------------------------------------------------------------- 06-12 • LENS FOCUS ADJUSTMENT --------------------------------------------------------------------- 06-13 • STATIC FOCUS ADJUSTMENT ----------------------------------------------------------------- 06-14 • BLUE DE-FOCUS ADJUSTMENT --------------------------------------------------------------- 06-15 • WHITE BALANCE and SUB BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT ----------------------------- 06-16 • HORIZONTAL POSITION (FINE) ADJUSTMENT ------------------------------------------ 06-17 • HD FOCUS CHARACTER SET UP ADJUSTMENT ----------------------------------------- 06-18 • HD FOCUS PATTERN SET UP ADJUSTMENT ---------------------------------------------- 06-19
Continued on Next Page
MARCH 2006 DP-1X CHASSIS Table of Contents Page 2 of 3
Continued from Previous Page SECTION (6) ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION (Continued):
• DIGITAL CONVERGENCE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE -------------------------------- 06-20 • STORING DIGITAL CONVERGENCE DATA ----------------------------------------------- 06-28 • INITIALIZING HD FOCUS SENSORS --------------------------------------------------------- 06-29 • CONVERGENCE TOUCH UP --------------------------------------------------------------------- 06-30 • REMOTE CONTROL CLU-5711 in DIGITAL CONVERGENCE MODE ----------------- 06-31 • REMOTE CONTROL CLU-5712 in DIGITAL CONVERGENCE MODE ----------------- 06-32 • REMOTE CONTROL CLU-4311 in DIGITAL CONVERGENCE MODE ----------------- 06-33 • MAGNET LOCATIONS ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 06-34 • SUB PICTURE (PIP) AMPLITUDE ADJUSTMENT ----------------------------------------- 06-35 • ERROR CODES for DCU HD FOCUS Description -------------------------------------------- 06-36
SECTION (7) AUDIO CIRCUIT INFORMATION:
• AUDIO SIGNAL (Main & Terminal) Circuit Diagram --------------------------------------- 07-01 • AUDIO SRS Circuit Diagram ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 07-02 • DP-17 AUDIO SIGNAL (Main & Terminal) Circuit Diagram ------------------------------ 07-03 • DP-17 AUDIO SURROUND Circuit Diagram -------------------------------------------------- 07-04
SECTION (8) MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION:
• DP-1X (Not DP-17) REAR PANEL ---------------------------------------------------------------- 08-01 • DP-17 REAR PANEL --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 08-02 • DEFLECTION / POWER PWB -------------------------------------------------------------------- 08-03 • SUB POWER SUPPLY PWB ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 08-04 • SIGNAL PWB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 08-05 • CRT PWB ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 08-06 • CONVERGENCE PWB ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 08-07 • TERMINAL PWB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 08-08 • SRS (SURROUND) PWB ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 08-09 • CHASSIS TOTAL ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 08-10 • DC VOLTAGES --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 08-11 • OVERLAY PART NUMBERS --------------------------------------------------------------------- 08-20
SECTION (9) SERVICE BULLETINS AND INFORMATION:
• PTV 01-01 Clarification of Memory Initialization Procedure ------------------------------------ 09-01 • PTV 01-02 Horizontal Noise Present when Cold (Anode Cup Arc) ---------------------------- 09-03 • PTV 01-04 Excessive Noise in PinP ----------------------------------------------------------------- 09-04 • PTV 01-05 Digital Convergence Adjustment Mode Access via Remote Control ------------- 09-05 • PTV 01-06 Intermittent Black Horizontal Bars (Low AC) --------------------------------------- 09-06 • PTV 01-08A Glue Residue when Removing Protective Plastic Sheet from Screen ----------- 09-07 • PTV 01-10 STOP displayed (CRT Snap) ----------------------------------------------------------- 09-08 • PTV 01-14 Symmetry (Geometry) Adjustments --------------------------------------------------- 09-10 • Poor Picture Quality when watching NTSC on a 2H (HD Ready) set ---------------------- 09-11 • Things You Should Know: Random Shutdown, Relay Stick, Coil Backwards, etc... ------- 09-12
MARCH 2006 DP-1X CHASSIS Table of Contents Page 3 of 3
Alvie W Rodgers
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DP-1X CHASSIS
MICROPROCESSOR INFORMATION
SECTION 1
Alvie W Rodgers
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DP-1X MICROPROCESSOR DATA COMMUNICATION DESCRIPTION
PAGE 01-01
Microprocessor Data Communications circuit diagram. (See Diagram on page 01-06) The Microprocessor must keep in communication with the Chassis to maintain control over the individual cir-cuits. Some of the circuits must return information as well so the Microprocessor will know how to respond to different request. The Microprocessor uses a combination of I2C Bus communication and the Serial Data, Clock and Load lines for control. The I2C communication scheme only requires 2 lines for control. These lines are called SDA and SCL. Serial Data and Serial Clock respectively. The Microprocessor also requires the use of what are called Fan Out IC or DACs, (Digital to Analog Converters). This allows the Microprocessor to use only two lines to control many different circuits. Also, due to the fact that this Microprocessor operates at the new 3.3Vdc voltage, it requires a Level Shift IC to bring up the DC level of the control lines to make it compatible with the connected ICs. The Microprocessor communicates with the following ICs: ON THE SIGNAL PWB: Main Tuner U501 PinP Tuner U502 EEPROM I002 Flex Converter UC01 DAC1 I006 DAC3 I007 Level Shift I004 3D Y/C I301 Main Video Chroma I501 Rainforest IC01 ON THE TERMINAL PWB: A/V Selector IX01 Sub Video Chroma IX03 Main Y Pr/Pb Selector IX04 Sub Y Pr/Pb Selector IX05 ON THE SURROUND PWB: Front Audio Control IA01 The following explanation will deal with the communication paths used between the Microprocessor and the re-spected ICs. ON THE SIGNAL PWB: Main Tuner U501 (with MTS outputs). The Microprocessor controls the Main Tuner by SDA (Data) and SCL (Clock) I2C communication lines. SCL1 and SDA1 lines for the Main Tuner are output from the Microprocessor at pins (2 SDA1 and 3 SCL1) re-spectively. These lines go directly to the Main Tuner, SDA1 at pin (5) and SCL1 at pin (4). These lines control band switching, programmable divider set-up information, pulse swallow tuning selection, etc... PinP Tuner U502 (monaural only, but audio not used). The Microprocessor controls the Main Tuner by SDA (Data) and SCL (Clock) I2C communication lines. SCL1 and SDA1 lines for the Main Tuner are output from the Microprocessor at pins (2 SDA1 and 3 SCL1) re-spectively. These lines go directly to the Main Tuner, SDA1 at pin (5) and SCL1 at pin (4). These lines control band switching, programmable divider set-up information, pulse swallow tuning selection, etc... EEPROM I003 The EEPROM is ROM for many different functions of the Microprocessor. Channel Scan or Memory List, Cus-tomer set ups for Video, Audio, Surround etc… are memorized as well. Also, some of the Microprocessors inter-nal sub routines have variables that are stored in the EEPROM, such as the window for Closed Caption detection.
(Continued on page 2)
DP-1X MICROPROCESSOR DATA COMMUNICATION DESCRIPTION
PAGE 01-02
(Continued from page 1) Data and Clock lines are SDA1 from pin (2) of the Microprocessor to pin (5) of the EEPROM and SCL2 from pin (3) of the Microprocessor to pin (6) of the EEPROM. Data travels in both directions on the Data line. Flex Converter UC01 The projection television is capable of displaying NTSC as well as ATSC (DTV) including HD (High Defini-tion). The Flex Converter is responsible for receiving any video input and converting it to 33.75 Khz output. This output is controlled by sync and by the customer’s menu and how it is set up. The set up can be 4X3 or 16X9 for DTV, or letterbox. This set also has something called “Through Mode”. This bypasses the Flex Con-verter completely and inputs the 1080i signal directly to the Rainforest IC. The Rainforest IC then output the signal directly as well as shrinking the vertical to match the 16 X 9 window by outputting “Vertical Squeeze”, (V Squeeze not used for the 16 X 9 models). The Flex Converter can take any NTSC, S-In, Component, NTSC or Progressive, Interlaced, 480I, 720P, 1080i signal. (Note: 1080i is routed through the Rainforest IC in 16 X 9 HD mode only). Control for the Flex Converter is Clock, Data and Enable l ines. Clock, Data and Enable lines for the Flex Converter are output from the Microprocessor at pins (45 Data and 46 FCENABLE). The FCENABLE line is routed through the PFC1 connector pin 12 and the FCDATA line is routed through the PFC1 connector pin 11. The Clock line must be routed through the Level Shift IC I004 to be brought up to 5V. The Microprocessor output for Clock is pin 58, it arrives at I004 at pins (3 Clock) and is output at pins (17). It arrives at the Flex Converter through the PFC1 connector pin 10. DAC1 I006 (See Diagram on page 01-07) This Digital to Analog converter acts as an extension of the Microprocessor. Sometimes called an Expansion IC. The purpose of this IC is to reduce the number of pins, (fan out) of the Main Microprocessor I001. The Main Microprocessor send Clock and Data via I2C bus to the DAC1 IC. The output from the Microprocessor is pin (2 SDA1 and 3 SCL1) which arrives at the DAC1 IC I006 at pins (5 and 6) respectively. The following is a list of the input and output pins on DAC1. PIN FUNCTION 1. Busy Receives Busy from DCU stopping Microprocessor from responding to Remote commands. 2. ST Det Receives the Low from the Main Tuner indicating Stereo signal received. 3. MTS Places the Main Tuner into MTS mode if Stereo MTS Detected by Microprocessor 4. F Mono Places the Main Tuner into Forced MONO mode 5. Ant Switches the antenna block into Antenna A or Antenna B when selected. 6. Cut Off In Service Mode, if Set Up is selected, outputs High to collapse Vertical circuit and inhibit Vert. Sweep Loss Detection 7. Magic Sw Places the Unit into Magic Focus Mode, outputs Lo when MF activated by front control switch or Customer’s Menu. 8. Gnd Ground 9. D Size During Magic Focus, the H and V Size has to be increased slightly for Sensor striking purposes. This pin goes Hi. 10. SAP Det Receives the Low from the Main Tuner indicating SAP signal received. 11. Gnd Ground Not Used 12. Gnd Ground Not Used 13. STBY 5V Standby +5 Volt input. 14. SDA1 Serial Data from Microprocessor 15. SCL1 Serial Clock from Microprocessor 16. SBY +5V Vcc SBY +5V NOTE: Pin 1 Busy and Pin 9 D Size works as a tri-data-level-input according to table below.
The Digital Convergence Module is active during Service Adjustment (DCAM), Magic Focus and/or Sensor Initialize.
(Continued on page 3)
Pin 1 Busy Pin 9 D Size Digital Convergence Module Active Magic Focus
Lo Lo Inactive Inactive
Hi Lo Active Inactive
Hi Hi Active Active
Lo Hi Not Possible Not Possible
DP-1X MICROPROCESSOR DATA COMMUNICATION DESCRIPTION
PAGE 01-03
(Continued from page 2) DAC3 I007 (See Diagram on page 01-07) This Digital to Analog converter acts as an extension of the Microprocessor. Sometimes called an Expansion IC. The purpose of this IC is to reduce the number of pins, (fan out) of the Main Microprocessor I001. The Main Microprocessor send Clock and Data via I2C bus to the DAC3 IC. The output from the Microprocessor is pin (2 SDA1 and 3 SCL1) which arrives at the DAC3 IC at pins (5 and 6) respectively. The following is a list of the input and output pins on DAC3. PIN FUNCTION 1 Sig Det Detects the presents of Sync from Component Y signal for 1 or 2 2 IR Det Detects IR from Remote for Auto Link Remote Set Up. 3 P Vol Activates Perfect Volume determined by Customer 4 AC3 Info T3 (Factory Use) 5 FH Det Out 1 T3 (Factory Use) 6 FH Det Out 2 T3 (Factory Use) 7 FC Blue Back (Factory Use) 8 Gnd Ground 9 Magic Sw In When Magic Switch pressed on front Control Panel this pin goes Low, IC tells Microprocessor to output a Low from
I006 pin 7 to start Magic Focus. 10 IN5DET Detects Cr/Pr plug insertion for Component 5 input. (Component 4 is detected by Selector IC pin 7)
• When no Cr/Pr plug inserted, set assumes Composite at the Y input. 11 Gnd Ground Not Used 12 Gnd Ground Not Used 13 Gnd Ground Not Used 14 SDA Data I2C communications between DAC2 and Microprocessor 15 SCL Clock I2C communications between DAC2 and Microprocessor 16 Vcc IC B+. (STBY +5V). NOTE: Pin 2 The IR pulse from the Remote Control is monitored when Auto Link is set. Level Shift I004 The Microprocessor operates at 3.3Vdc. Most of the Circuits controlled by the Microprocessor operate at 5Vdc. The Level Shift IC steps up the DC voltage to accommodate. • Pin 4 output a Clock, used by the Flex Converter • Pin 11 output Error Mute signal (ERRMUTE), used to mute the Out to Hi-Fi jacks on the SRS PWB. • Pin 13 outputs a Speaker Off signal (FSPOFF), used to turn off the internal speakers. 3D Y/C I301 (IC mounted directly on the Signal PWB). The 3D Y/C IC is a Luminance/Chrominance separator, as well as a 3D adder. Separation takes place digitally. Using advanced separation technology, this circuit separates using multiple lines and doesn’t produce dot pat-tern interference or dot crawl. The 3D effect is a process of adding additional emphasis signals to the Lumi-nance and Chrominance. These signals relate specifically to transitions. Transitions are the point where the sig-nal goes from dark to light or vice versa. The 3D adds a little more black before the transition goes to white and a little more white just before it gets to white. It also adds a little more white just before it goes dark and a little more dark just before it arrives. This gives the impression that the signal pops out of the screen or a 3D effect. The Microprocessor communicates with the 3D Y/C IC via I2C bus data and clock. The communications ports from the Microprocessor are pins (59 SDA2 and 60 SCL2) to the 3D Y/C I301 pins (59 and 60) respectively. The Microprocessor also is able to turn on and off circuits within the 3D Y/C circuit determined by customer menu set-up. Main Video Chroma I501 The Main Video Chroma IC processes the video and chroma from the 3D Y/C circuit for the main picture. It converts video into Y and chroma into Cr/Cb (NTSC Only). Communication from the Microprocessor via pins (59 SDA2 and 60 SCL2) to I501 pins (34 and 33) respectively.
(Continued on page 4)
DP-1X MICROPROCESSOR DATA COMMUNICATION DESCRIPTION
PAGE 01-04
(Continued from page 3) Rainforest IC01 (Video/Chroma Processor) The Video Processing IC (Rainforest) is responsible for controlling video/chroma processing before the signal is made available to the CRTs. Some of the emphasis circuits are controlled by the customer’s menu. As well as some of them being controlled by AI, (Artificial Intelligence). Communication from the Microprocessor via pins (59 SDA2 and 60 SCL2) to the Rainforest IC pins (31 and 30) respectively. ON THE TERMINAL PWB: (Through the connector PST1) A/V Selector IX01 The A/V Selector IC is responsible for selecting the input source for the Main Picture as well as the source for the PinP or Sub picture. Communication from the Microprocessor via pins (2 SDA1 and 3 SCL1) to the PST1 connector pins (5 and 4) respectively then to IX01 pins (34 and 33) respectively. Sub Video Chroma IX03 The Sub Video Chroma IC processes the video and chroma for the Sub or PinP picture. It converts Luminance into Y and Chroma into Cr/Cb (NTSC Only). Communication from the Microprocessor via pins (59 SDA2 and 60 SCL2) to connector PST1 pins (8 and 7) to IX03 pins (34 and 33) respectively. Main Y Pr/Pb Selector IX04 Any input that is not already in the Y Pr/Pb or Y Cr/Cb state, will have be converted to this state by I501. The Main Y Pr/Pb Selector IC selects the appropriate input between the Tuner, AV Inputs, S-Inputs or Compo-nents. Communication from the Microprocessor via pins (59 SDA2 and 60 SCL2) to connector PST1 pins (8 and 7) to IX04 pins (31 and 30) respectively. Sub Y Pr/Pb Selector IX04 Any Sub input that is not already in the Y Pr/Pb or Y Cr/Cb state, will have be converted to this state by IX03. The Sub Y Pr/Pb Selector IC selects the appropriate input between the Tuner, AV Inputs, S-Inputs or Compo-nents. Communication from the Microprocessor via pins (59 SDA2 and 60 SCL2) to connector PST1 pins (8 and 7) to IX05 pins (31 and 30) respectively. ON THE SURROUND PWB (Through the PSU1 connector): Front Audio Control IC IA01 Audio control is performed by this IC. Selection for different Audio modes, volume, base, treble, etc... The Main Microprocessor sends Clock and Data via I2C bus to this IC. The output from the Microprocessor is pins (59 SDA2 and 60 SCL2) respectively then through the connector PSU1 pins (2 and 1) which arrives at IA01 at pins (4 and 5) respectively.
DP1
X (N
ot D
P17)
CH
ASS
IS M
ICR
OPR
OC
ESSO
R D
ATA
CO
MM
UN
ICA
TIO
NS
CIR
CU
IT D
IAG
RA
M
PAGE 01-05
U50
2Tu
ner
PinP
SDA
1
SCL1
DSP
Res
et
DSP
SI
DSP
SCK
DSP
SS
IOO
1
6059
SCL2
SDA
2
SRS
PWB
Clo
ck
Dat
a
FCEn
able
3
I004
3.3V
-> 5
VL
evel
Shi
ft
4 5 6 7
17 15 14 13
58 5746 18 17 16
8 912 11
15 14
DSP
Res
et
DSP
SI B
ypas
s
DSP
Sck
Ft S
pk Off
DSP
SS
DSP
DIR
PSU
2
9 2 1 4 5
PSU
1
2 1
IA01
Fron
tA
udio
Con
trol
SCL2
SDA
2SC
L2
SDA
2
IX03
Sub
Vid
eoC
hrom
a
PST
1
Sign
al P
WB
IX01
A/V
Sel
ect
SCL1
34 33
SDA
1
4 5
32
SCL1
SDA
1IO
O3
EEPR
OM
5 6
SDA
1
SCL1
I007
DA
C3
SCL1
SDA
1
1514
15 14
SCL1
SDA
1I0
06D
AC
1
Term
inal
PW
B
DSP
Res
et S
RS
DSP
SI B
YPA
SS
FT S
pk O
ff
DSP
SS
4 5
U50
1T
uner
1 M
ain
4SD
A1
SCL1
5
3334SD
A2
SCL2
8
FCD
ata
45
SDA2
IC01
Rai
nfor
est
Swee
p C
ont.
3031
I301
3D/Y
C6059
SCL2
I501
Mai
n V
ideo
/C
hrom
a3433
IX04
Mai
n Y
PrPb
Sele
ctor
3031SD
A2
SCL2
IX05
Sub
YPr
PbSe
lect
or3031
SDA
2 SCL2
7 5 4
SDA
2
SCL2
16D
ATA
Not
Use
d
Not
Use
d
Not
Use
d
Not
Use
d
Not
Use
d
12N
ot U
sed
ERR
MU
TE
13N
ot U
sed
Mut
es O
ut to
Hi-F
i jac
ks.
ERR
MU
TE
DA
TA
CLO
CK
64Fr
ont S
peak
er O
ff
��������������������������������������������������
��������������������������������������������������
��������������������������������������������������
��������������������������������������������������
��������������������������������������������������
Clo
ck
Dat
a
UC
01FL
EX & PinP
PFC
1
Enab
le12 11 10
FT S
pk O
ff
ERR
MU
TE
DP
-17
CH
ASS
IS M
ICR
OP
RO
CE
SSO
R D
AT
A C
OM
MU
NIC
AT
ION
S C
IRC
UIT
DIA
GR
AM
PAGE 01-06
U50
2T
uner
Pin
PSD
A1
SCL
1
DSP
Res
et
DSP
SI
DSP
SCK
DSP
SS
IOO
1
6059
SCL
2
SDA
2
Surr
ound
PW
B
Clo
ck
Dat
a
FCE
nabl
e
3
I004
3.3V
->
5V
Lev
el S
hif
t
4 5 6 7
17 15 14 13
58 5746 18 17 16
8 9
12 11
15 19
DSP
Res
et
DSP
SI
Byp
ass
DSP
Sck
Ft S
pk Off
DSP
SS
DS
P E
rror
Mut
e
PSU
2
PSU
1
2 1
IS01
Fro
nt
Au
dio
Con
trol
SCL
2
SDA
2SC
L2
SDA
2
IX03
Su
b V
ideo
Ch
rom
a
PST
1Si
gnal
PW
B
IX01
A/V
Sel
ect
SCL
1
34 33
SDA
1
4 5
32
SCL
1
SDA
1
IOO
3E
EP
RO
M
5 6
SDA
1
SCL
1
I007
DA
C3
SCL
1
SDA
1
1514
15 14
SCL
1
SDA
1I0
06D
AC
1
Term
inal
PW
B
DSP
Res
et S
RS
DSP
SI
BY
PASS
FT
Spk
Off
DSP
SS
4 5
U50
1T
uner
1 M
ain
4SD
A1
SCL
1
5
3334SD
A2
SCL
2
8
FC
Dat
a45
SDA2
IC01
Rai
nfo
rest
Sw
eep
Con
t.3031
I301
3D/Y
C6059
SCL2
I501
Mai
n V
ideo
/C
hro
ma
3433IX
04M
ain
YP
rPb
Sel
ecto
r3031
SDA
2
SCL
2
IX05
Sub
YP
rPb
Sele
ctor
3031SD
A2
SCL
2
7 5 4
SDA
2
SCL
2
16D
AT
A
ER
RM
UT
E
SRS
(Not
Use
d)
ER
RM
UT
E
DA
TA
CL
OC
K
1716B
yPas
s (N
ot U
sed)
Clo
ck
Dat
a
UC
01FL
EX
&P
inP
PF
C1
Ena
ble
12 11 10
ER
RM
UT
E
DS
PC
IRC
UIT
9 2 1 4 51213
DSP
Bus
y
DSP
S0
DSP
DIR
DSP
Req
uest
8 3 6 7D
SP C
SI10
12 13 14 11 10
DSP
Bus
y
DSP
S0
DSP
DIR
DSP
Req
uest
DSP
CSI
Mut
es O
ut to
Hi-
Fi ja
cks.
64F
ront
Spe
aker
Off
CL
OC
K
DP-1X SERIES CHASSIS DAC 1 and DAC 3 INFORMATION
PA
GE
01
-07
Detects IR from Remote for Auto Link Remote Set Up
1
2
I007
Sig Det
IR Det
DAC 3
Detects active Sync from Component Y signal for 1 or 2
3P Vol Activates Perfect Volume determined by Customer
4AC3 Info T4 (Factory Use)
5FH Det Out 1 T5 (Factory Use)
6FH Det Out 2 T6 (Factory Use)
7FC Blue Back T7 (Factory Use)
9Magic Sw In When Magic Switch pressed on Ft. Control Panel, this pin goes low, Micro tells I006 pin 7 to go high.
10IN5DET Detect Pr/Cr plug insertion for Component 5 input. If NO, then composite is assumed.
14SDA1 Serial Data from Microprocessor
15SCL1 Serial Clock from Microprocessor
8 Gnd
16 Vcc SBY +5V
11 NotUsed
12 NotUsed
13 NotUsed
1
2
I006
ST Det
SAP Det
DAC1
3MTS
4F Mono
5ANT
6Cut Off In Service Mode, if Set Up is selected, outputs High to collapse Vertical circuit and inhibit Vert. Sweep Loss Detection
7Magic Sw. Out When Magic Focus Sw pressed or from Menu Selection, this pin goes Low and Places the DCU into Magic Focus Mode
9D SizeDuring Magic Focus, when the H and V Size has to be increased slightly for Sensor striking purposes. The DCUoutput D Size (Hi). (Not in the 16X9 models
10
Busy Receives Busy from DCU stopping Microprocessor from responding to Remote commands.
14SDA1 Serial Data from Microprocessor
15SCL1 Serial Clock from Microprocessor
8 Gnd
16
11 NotUsed
12 NotUsed
13 SBY +5V
Places the Main Tuner into MTS mode if Stereo MTS Detected by Microprocessor
Places the Main Tuner into Forced MONO mode
Switches the Antenna Switch Assembly from Antenna 1 to Antenna 2
Receives the Low from the Main Tuner indicating Stereo signal received.
Receives the Low from the Main Tuner indicating SAP signal received.
Vcc SBY +5V
Note: Component 4 Pr/Cr is detected by the Selector IC.
DP-1X ON SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) SIGNAL PATH DESCRIPTION
PAGE 01-08
The Microprocessor is responsible for generating On Screen Display (OSD) related to the Main Menu, Volume Control, Channel Number, Closed Caption Display, Clock, etc… It also generates the OSD for the Service Menu. However there are actually two different sources for generating OSD, the Microprocessor and the Digital Conver-gence Unit, (DCU). MICROPROCESSOR AS THE SOURCE FOR OSD: The Microprocessor receives information related to timing for H. Blanking pin (49) and V. Blanking pin (55). The Microprocessor determines the position for each display using these signals as a timing pulse. When it’s necessary, the Microprocessor generates 1uSec pulses from pins (37 Red, 38 Green and 39 Blue) that are routed through (QC21 Red, QC20 Green and QC19 Blue) and then sent to the Rainforest IC IC01 pins (39 Red, 38 Green and 37 Blue) as OSD signals. When the OSD signals are high, they turn on the output of the Red or Green or Blue chroma amps inside the Rainforest IC and output a pulse to the CRTs to generate that particular character in the particular color. HALF TONE PIN (40): This pin is responsible for controlling the background transparency of the Main Menu. When the customer calls up the Main Menu, they can select the CUSTOM section. Within the CUSTOM section is MENU BACK-GROUND. There are three selections for this, GRAY, SHADED, and CLEAR. • CLEAR: Selection turns off any background for the Menu and video is clearly seen behind the Menu.
• CLEAR: No output during the display of the Menu. • SHADED: Selection add a transparent background which makes the Menu easier to see and also some of the
video behind the Menu. • SHADED: 1/2 Vcc pulse equal to the timing of the Menu background.
• GRAY: Selection generates a GRAY background for the MENU blocking video behind the Menu. This is accomplished by outputting any one of three different pulses from pin (40) of the Microprocessor. This signal is then routed to (QC16) and then to the Rainforest IC IC01 pin (36) as YS1 signal which does the following: • GRAY: Full Vcc equal to the timing of the Menu background.
OSD BLANKING PIN (51): This pin is responsible for muting the video at the same time each character is produced by the Microprocessor. This pulse is in exact time with the character, however it is slightly longer. In other words, just before any charac-ter is produced, this pin goes high and just after any character turns off, this pin turns off. This clears up the video behind the OSD character to make it easier to read. OSD Blk is produced from pin (51) of the Microprocessor. This signal is then routed to the Rainforest IC IC01 pins (50 YS2 OSD and 51 YS1 OSD) which mutes the video when these pins are high. They also prevent the out-put of the peak high Y component for Velocity Modulation. CLOSED CAPTION DISPLAY FROM THE MICROPROCESSOR SOURCE: The Microprocessor is also responsible for stripping the Closed Caption Display (CCD) from within the Vertical Sync on horizontal line 21. It receives the composite video signal at pin (28). This signal is tapped off the main video path before it arrives at sync separator Q010~12. The tapped video is routed through Q014 to the Micro-processor at pin (28). (See Sync Signal Path Circuit Diagram and Explanation for Details). DCU (Digital Convergence Unit HC2153) AS THE OSD SOURCE: The DCU (Digital Convergence Unit) generates it’s own OSD patterns and text. Like the Adjustment Grid, Cur-sor, certain blinking patterns, Words associated with DCAM, etc… The DCU generates OSD in the same fashion as the Microprocessor. The DCU generates Digital Red from pin (11), Digital Green from pin (12) and Digital Blue from pin (10) output from the PDG connector and then through (QK06 Dig Red, QK07 Dig Green and QK08 Dig Blue). The DCU OSD is then routed through the PDK1 connector pins (11 Red, 12 Green and 13 Blue) and then through the PSD1 connector pins (2 Red, 4 Green and 6 Blue) They then are sent through (QC24 Red, QC23 Green and QC22 Blue) and finally arrive at the Rainforest IC IC01 pins (35 Analog Red In, 34 Analog Green In and 33 Analog Blue In) as Digital Convergence graphic signals.
(Continued on page 9)
DP-1X ON SCREEN DISPLAY (OSD) SIGNAL PATH DESCRIPTION
PAGE 01-09
(Continued from page 8) BUSY SIGNAL: When the DCU is activated by pressing the Service Only switch on the Deflection PWB, the DCU outputs a BUSY signal. This signal does two things. 1. It tells the Microprocessor to ignore Infrared Remote commands. It does this by outputting the BUSY sig-
nal from pin (10) of the PDG connector, then through the PDK1 connector pin (10). Then through the PSD1 connector pin (1). Then to I006 (the Analog to Digital converter). The Analog to Digital converter outputs this information in digital form through the I2C bus to the microprocessor. The I2C data is output from pin (14 SDA1 and timed by the clock 15 SCL1) They arrive at the Microprocessor I001 pins (2 and 3). When the Microprocessor receives this BUSY signal, it ignores all Infrared Remote commands.
2. It blanks video so that the DCU graphics can be see easily. This is accomplished by the same BUSY signal being routed from pin (10) of the PDG connector, then through the PDK1 connector pin (10). Then through the PSD1 connector pin (1). It is then routed to the Rainforest IC IC01 pin (49) as YS3 signal which mutes video.
GRAPHICS PRODUCED BY THE DCU: • Cross hatch grid. • Colored Cursor which blinks indicating the adjustment point • Different text such as, Read from ROM?, Write to ROM? • Light pattern for Sensor Initialization • Light pattern for Magic Focus. • The DCU can also turn off individual colors during adjustment. Everything except Green. This is accom-
plished by not producing the particular color’s characters from the DCU.
PD
K3
PSD
2
OSD
Blu
e
OSD
Gre
en
OSD
Red
DP
-1X
CH
ASS
IS "
On
Scre
en D
ispl
ay, O
SD"
SIG
NA
L C
IRC
UIT
DIA
GR
AM
I001
Mai
n uP
OSD
B
OSD
G
OSD
R
Sign
al P
WB
Dig
ital
Con
verg
ence
Uni
t"D
CU
""M
ount
ed o
nD
efle
ctio
nPW
B"
Def
lect
ion
PW
B
UK
DG
HC
2152
/3
PD
G
10B
USY
1
4 5 6 7321-5
V
+5V
+5V
SR
AM
H B
lkD
Siz
e
V B
lk
IC01
Rai
nfor
est
PSD
1
1
To CRTs
B G R
41 42 43
Hal
f T
one
PZ
C
5 3 1
Sign
al P
WB
Dig
B13
25
Dig
G4
124
Dig
R11
6 2
PAGE 01-10
39 38 37 40
3 228Sy
nc f
or C
lose
d C
aptio
nan
d V
-Chi
p D
ata
30Sy
nc2
for
V-C
hip
Dat
a
Mai
n
Sub
OSD
YS
51O
SD B
lkI0
06D
AC
1
15 14
SCL
1
SDA
1
1B
USY
37 38 39 33 34 3550 36
Ana
log
B I
n
YS1
YS2
OSD
Ana
log
G I
n
Ana
log
R I
n
B O
ut
G O
ut
R O
ut
YS2
Ana
log
B I
n
Ana
log
G I
n
Ana
log
R I
n
QK
08
QK
07
QK
06
QC
22
QC
23
QC
24
QC
19
QC
20
QC
21
OSD
YM
49Y
S3R
GB
QC
16
QC
17V
Mut
e
49 55
H S
ync
V S
ync
Q00
6
Q00
5H
Blk
V B
lk
51Y
S1 O
SD
8
PD
K1
10 212 11
Con
verg
ence
PW
B
9
D S
ize
D S
ize
QC
30
QC
35
QC
40
13
DP-1X AUDIO and VIDEO MUTE SIGNAL PATH DESCRIPTION
PAGE 01-11
V MUTE 1 EXPLANATION: (See Diagram on page 01-13) There are certain times when the Microprocessor or other circuits must Mute the video or audio. The Microproc-essor is responsible for Muting the Audio/Video during Channel Change, Power On/Off, Child Lock, AVX Se-lected with no input, etc…. This is accomplished via pin (56) of the Microprocessor. When V Mute is activated, a high is routed through D019 to the base of Q023 turning it ON. The collector goes low and pulls the base of Q022 low turning it ON. The emitter of Q022 is connected to STBY +11V, so when it turns ON, it’s collector output goes HIGH. This high is now called V Mute 1. V Mute 1 is routed to two circuits, for Video Mute and for Audio Mute. FOR VIDEO MUTE: There are two different signals that mute video on the Rainforest IC, IC01 pin (52 FBP In): 1. V MUTE 1
• This high is routed through the PSZ2 connector pin (6) to DX08. DX08 sends this high to the base of QX18 turning it OFF. The emitter of QX18 is connected to the SW +9V line and when it turns OFF the emitter pulls up HIGH. This pulls up pin (25) of IX01 the Rainforest IC and Mutes the Video. Oddly enough, this high is sent into the same pin as the Flyback Pulse used for horizontal blanking. So it can be thought of as an extremely long blank pulse.
2. HALF TONE PIN: This pin is responsible for controlling the background transparency of the Main Menu. When the customer calls up the Main Menu, they can select the CUSTOM section. Within the CUSTOM section is MENU BACKGROUND. There are three selections for this, GRAY, SHADED, and CLEAR. • CLEAR: Selection turns off any background for the Menu and video is clearly seen behind the Menu.
• CLEAR: No output during the display of the Menu. • SHADED: Selection add a transparent background which makes the Menu easier to see and also some of
the video behind the Menu. • SHADED: 1/2 Vcc pulse equal to the timing of the Menu background.
• GRAY: Selection generates a GRAY background for the MENU blocking video behind the Menu. This is accomplished by outputting any one of three different pulses from pin (40) of the Microprocessor. This signal is then routed to (QC16) and then to the Rainforest IC IC01 pin (36) as YS1 signal which does the following: • GRAY: Full Vcc equal to the timing of the Menu background.
V Mute 1 FOR AUDIO MUTE: The V Mute 1 signal is also routed to the base of Q021 turning it ON. The high produced on it’s emitter is now called V Mute 2 which is routed to two places.
1. To the anode of DJ04, to the base of QJ03 which turn ON and grounds pin (11) of IJ01 placing the Front Audio output IC into Mute.
2. To PSU1 connector pin (5) which mutes the (OUT TO HiFi) audio. See the SRS Mute Circuit diagram details.
ERRMUTE pin (19) of the Microprocessor: When the Microprocessor deems it necessary to mute the audio, it outputs a ERRMute signal from pin (19) to I004 pin (9) the Level Shift IC. This IC outputs the high from pin (11) to two places;
1. To the anode of DJ01, then to the base of QJ01 and QJ02 which grounds the audio input to pin (4 Right
audio in and 2 Left audio in) of IJ01 Audio Output IC. 2. To the Surround PWB via the PSU1 connector pin (6) called Mute. Then to DA02 to drive the base of
QA05 and QA06 high, turning them on. They ground the audio outputs for (OUT TO HiFi) and they are muted.
See the Surround Mute Circuit diagram and explanation for details.
(Continued on page 12)
DP-1X AUDIO and VIDEO MUTE SIGNAL PATH DESCRIPTION
PAGE 01-12
(Continued from page 11) F.Spk Off FRONT SPEAKER OFF: When the customer accesses the Main Menu and selects the Front Speaker Off selection, the Microprocessor I001 outputs a high from pin (16). This high is routed to I004 pin (7) the Level Shift IC. This IC outputs the high from pin (13) to the following circuit;
1. To the anode of DJ02, then to the base of QJ01 and QJ02 which grounds the audio input to pin (4 Right audio in and 2 Left audio in) of IJ01 Audio Output IC.
• NOTE: This line also goes to PSU1 connector pin 4, but not used in this chassis. AC LOSS DETECTION: AC is monitored by the AC Loss detection circuit. The AC input from PQS1 pin (1) is rectified by D023. This charges up C054 and through DN22 it charges C053. When AC is first applied, C053 charges slightly behind C054 preventing activation of Q024. If AC is lost, C054 discharges rapidly pulling the base of Q024 low, how-ever D022 blocks C053 from discharging and the emitter of Q001 is held high. This action turns on Q024 and produces a high on it’s collector. This high is routed through D021 to the base of Q023 turning it ON. The col-lector goes low and pulls the base of Q022 low turning it ON. The emitter of Q022 is connected to STBY +11V, so when it turns ON, it’s collector output goes HIGH. This high is now called V Mute 1. V Mute 1 is routed to two circuits, see V Mute 1 explanation on the previous page. SPOT: SPOT is generated from the deflection PWB when either Horizontal or Vertical deflection is lost. This is to pre-vent a horizontal or vertical line from being burnt into the CRTs. See Horizontal and Vertical Sweep Loss De-tection circuit and explanation for details. This high is input from PSD2 pin (3), through D020 to the base of Q023 turning it ON. The collector goes low and pulls the base of Q022 low turning it ON. The emitter of Q022 is connected to STBY +11V, so when it turns ON, it’s collector output goes HIGH. This high is now called V Mute 1. V Mute 1 is routed to two circuits, see V Mute 1 explanation on the previous page.
R193
Q023
Righ
t Ft.
Audi
o
Left
Ft.
Audio
F. S
pk O
ff
Q022
I001
DP
-1X
Ser
ies
Ch
assi
s A
UD
IO a
nd
VID
EO
MU
TE
Cir
cuit
Wit
ho
ut
DS
P (
See
als
o S
urro
und
Mut
e C
ircui
t)
D020
3
D019
D018
D017
V. M
ute
1
Micr
o Pr
oces
sor
V M
UTE
"SPO
T"Ho
rizon
tal S
wee
p Lo
ss D
et.
Vert
ical
Sw
eep
Loss
Det
.(F
rom
Def
lect
ion
PWB)
IJ01
FRO
NT L
&RAu
dio
Out
put
Mut
e
CJ05
4 2
R In
R O
ut
L In
L O
ut
CJ04
11
Sign
al P
WB
PAGE 01-13
SBY
+11V
56
CJ02
CJ01
7 12
Mut
e =
Lo
D022
R197
C053
R007
C054
D023
PQS1
R198Fr
om I9
04Pi
n 3
AC P
hoto
Cou
pler
AC S
ig
Q02
4
1R1
96
D021
R195
R194
R192
R189
R191
C052
V M
ute
1
R195
Q021
R187
ERRM
ute
QJ02
RC04
QJ01
RC03
QJ03
RC07
DJ03
RC08
RC09
41110 6
DJ02
DJ01
5V
Mut
e 2
19I0
149
11
ERR
Mut
e
ERRM
ute
Leve
l Shif
t
TruS
urro
und/
SRS
PWB
VMut
e2
R0A0
PSD2
PSU1
10V
p/p
13F. S
pk O
ff16
7Ft
Spk
Off
R022
R199
R186
DJ04
QC1
7IC
01
52YM
/P-
Mut
eBl
k
CRT PWB
RC54
RC63
HVcc
+9V RC
56
19
7PZC
QC1
6O
SD Y
M
ERRM
ute
V M
ute
2
See
OSD
Sig
nal P
ath
CC09
CC08
DP
-17
Seri
es C
hass
is A
UD
IO a
nd V
IDE
O M
UT
E C
ircu
it(S
ee a
lso
DP
-17
Surr
ound
Mut
e C
ircu
it)
PAGE 01-14
QC1
7
Righ
t Ft.
Audi
o
Left
Ft. A
udio
F. S
pk O
ff
Q022
R193
I001
D020
3
D019
D018
D017
Micr
o Pr
oces
sor
V M
UTE
IC01
52YM
/P-
Mut
eBl
k
"SPO
T"Ho
rizon
tal S
wee
p Lo
ss D
et.
Vert
ical
Sw
eep
Loss
Det
.(F
rom
Def
lect
ion
PWB)
IJ01
FRO
NT L
& R
Audi
o O
utpu
t
CJ05
4 2
CJ04
11
CRT PWB
Sign
al P
WB
SW +
35V
56
CJ02
7 12
Mut
e =
Lo
D022
R197
C053
R007
C054
D023
PQS1
R198Fr
om I9
04Pi
n 3
AC P
hoto
Cou
pler
AC S
ig
Q02
4
1R1
96
D021
R195
R194
Q023R1
92R1
89
R191
C052
V M
ute
1
R188
Q021
R187
V M
ute
2
ERRM
ute
QJ01
RC03
QJ02
RC04
QJ03
RJ07
DJ03
RJ08
RJ09
RC54
RC63
HVcc
+9V
41110 65V
Mut
e 2
From
IS01
Pin
7
19I0
049
5
11
ERR
Mut
e
ERRM
ute
Leve
l Shif
t
Aud
ioDS
P
Surr
ound
PW
B
R0A0
PSD2
PSU2
PSU1
10V
p/p
13F. S
pk O
ff16
7Ft
Spk
Off
R022
R199
R186
RC56
19
7PZC
QC1
6O
SD Y
M
V. M
ute
1
DJ02DJ
22
DJ01
DJ04
CJ01
IJ02
CENT
ER L
& R
Audi
o O
utpu
t
CJ31
4 2
CR In
CJ30
11
CJ29
7 12
Mut
e =
Lo
QJ05
RJ31
QJ06
RJ32
QJ07
RJ33
DJ14
RJ34
RJ35
DJ12
DJ11DJ
13
CJ28
20PSU2
19
Cent
er
Cent
Spk
Off
DJ21
CJ35
CJ37
Cent
CJ09
CJ08
1 of
2
2 of
2
ERRM
ute
From
IS01
Pin
6
D029
D040
CR O
ut
CL In
CL O
ut
FR In
FR O
ut
FL In
FL O
ut
Activ
e Hi
gh
DP-
1X S
erie
s Cha
ssis
Tru
Surr
ound
/ SR
S M
UT
E C
ircu
it(S
ee a
lso
Audi
o Vi
deo
Mut
e C
ircu
it)
PAGE 01-15
ERR
Mut
e65
V M
ute
2
IA01
Aud
ioC
ontr
ol
Mut
e
VM
ute
PSU
1
HiF
i R
QA
05 HiF
i L
QA
06D
A02
DA
04
DA
01D
A03
SCL2
114
SCL
SDA
22
13SD
A
DP-1
7 Ch
assi
s SU
RRO
UND
MUT
E Ci
rcui
t(S
ee a
lso D
P-17
Aud
io V
ideo
Mut
e Ci
rcui
t)
PAGE 01-16
IS01
Audi
oD/
A
ERRM
ute
VMut
e
PSU1
HiFi
R
QS1
5 HiFi
L
DS19
DS20
DS17
DS18
SCL2
114
SCL
SDA2
213
SDA
IS15
REAR
L &
RAu
dio
Out
put
or S
urro
und
L &
R
CSJ2
4 2
SR In
CSJ1
11
CSH9
7 12
Mut
e =
Lo
QS0
7
RS96QS0
8RS
97
QS0
9RS
98DS
10
RS99
RSA1
DS26DS
08
DS07
DS09
CSH8
CSJ7
CSJ6
Rear
R
13R
Spk
Off
ERRM
ute
65V
Mut
e 2
Sub
Woo
fer
DS22
DS23
DS21
Rear
L
5
PSU2
DT02
QS1
6
IT10
1 7FL
Fro
nt L
eft
FR F
ront
Rig
ht
1 7Ce
nter
Sub
Woo
fer
Rear
LRe
ar R
IT12 Su
rroun
d 2
of 4
Surro
und
3 of
4
Surro
und
2 of
4Su
rroun
d 1
of 4
Surro
und
3 of
4
Surround 1 of 4
QT0
8
QT0
7Q
T03
QT0
4
QT0
5
QT0
6
QT1
0Q
T09
ERRM
ute
Surro
und
# of
4 i
ndica
tes
this
circu
it on
the
Surro
und
# of
4 S
chem
atic
Page
(DP1
7 O
nly)
.
SR O
ut
SL In
SL O
ut
From
IS10
pin
4
From
IS10
pin
39
From
IS08
pin
1
From
IS09
pin
1 &
7
From I004 pin 11
QS1
8
DP-1X MEMORY INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE (EEPROM RESET)
PAGE 01-17
WARNING: This should only be done in extreme cases. I2C Data will be reset as well. Be sure and write down all data values before continuing. NOTE: Sub Brightness and Horizontal Position for HD and Progressive will be reset to an in-correct value. Be sure to enter Service Menu, (with power off, press and hold the INPUT but-ton, then press and hold POWER. I2C Service Menu will appear. The second selection is SUB BRIT. Write this value down. On the Second page is H. POSI, write this value down in Pro-gressive and in HD mode. 1) Disconnect Power to Television. 2) Remove the Back Cover. 3) Remove the two screws holding the Main chassis to the Cabinet if necessary. 4) Disconnect wiring harness clips to free up the chassis if necessary. 5) Reconnect Power to the Television and turn the set ON. 6) Locate PRST and add a jumper between pins 1 and 2 of the PRST connector as shown be-
low. 7) Hold jumper in place for 5 seconds. (A beep will NOT be heard). 8) Remove the jumper. 9) Confirm EEPROM reset, Input source is now set to Air and not to Cable 1 or 2. No Child
Lock, and only channels 2 through 13 are in memory. 10) Power Off 11) Reassemble Chassis and reinstall PTV back. 12) Enter the I2C Service Menu and re-enter the values for SUB BRIT and H.POSI
(Progressive and HD modes). • Failure to re-enter these values will result in a dark picture and the horizontal centering will
be shifted off to the right. Convergence may be affected as well. • DO NOT ATTEMPT TO CORRECT H. Centering with Convergence Adjustments. • NOTE: All customers' Auto Programming and Set-Ups are returned to factory settings.
R166
I001MicroProcessor
CLOCKKEY-IN2
8
2 1PRSTConnector
Jumper
58
R017
SBY +3.3V
D008
R176
SBY +3.3V
DP-1X FACTORY RESET CONDITION
PAGE 01-18
HITACHI USER CONTROL INITIALIZE (FACTORY RESET)
FUNCTION INITIAL DATA/CONDITION NTSC Channel (Main, Sub) 03 CH INPUT MODE Antenna A SLEEP TIMER Not Registered
MULTI WINDOW MODE Off PIP Mode Single (Bottom Right) Freeze Mode Single (Bottom Right) SET UP MENU LANGUAGE English
ANTENNA/CABLE Antenna CHANNEL MEMORY 2 ~ 13 CH EDIT CHANNEL MEMORY -- CLOCK SET Not Registered MAGIC FOCUS -- PICTURE FORMATS ASPECT STYLE Aspect 1 V. POSITION 0 COMPOSITE COLOR TYPE SDTV/HD VIDEO DISPLAY 1080i CUSTOMIZE NAME THE CHANNELS Not Registered NAME THE INPUTS Not Registered FAVORITE CHANNELS Not Registered PARENTAL LOCKS Not Registered PROGRAM TIMER Not Registered CAPTION / DISPLAY Not Registered CLOSED CAPTION CCD DISPLAY Off CCD MODE C.C. CCD CHANNEL Channel 1 MENU BACKGROUND Shaded VIDEO CONTRAST 100% BRIGHTNESS 50% COLOR 50% TINT Center SHARPNESS 50% ADVANCED SETTINGS PERFECT PICTURE Off AUTO COLOR On NOISE REDUCTION Off
COLOR TEMPERATURE Cool
HELP MODE Off
PLUG & PLAY —
VELOCITY MODULATION On BLACK LEVEL EXPANSION On
DP-1X FACTORY RESET CONDITION
PAGE 01-19
HITACHI USER CONTROL INITIALIZE (FACTORY RESET)
AUDIO INITIAL DATA/CONDITION BASS 63% TREBLE 50% BALANCE Center
ADVANCED SETTINGS MTS Mode Stereo INTERNAL SPEAKERS On AUTO NOISE CANCEL Off LOUDNESS Off PERFECT VOLUME Off DYNAMIC BASS (DP17 Only) On THEATER THEATER MODE Sports SURROUND SRS On BBE Off SURROUND (DP16 Only) TRUSURROUND/SRS/Off TruSurround SURROUND (DP17 Only) OFF/STADIUM/ROCK ARENA/JAZZ Standard
Analog VID 4 Optical VID 5 Coaxial LISTENING POSITION Mid LISTENING MODE Standard
INPUT SOURCE (DP17 Only)
SPEAKER SET UP (DP17 Only) FRONT L/R Internal SURROUND Yes SUB WOOFER Yes
PAGE 01-20
1. I2C Parameter List(1) Adjust Mode OSD
Press POWER + INPUTof control panel.
B C
UT
3F
G C
UT
3F
R C
UT
3F
G D
RV
3F
AD
JUS
T M
OD
EX
XX
XX
XX
X
SE
RV
ICE
SU
B B
RT
*W
HIT
E B
AL
R D
RV
(C
OO
L)*
3F B
DR
V (
CO
OL)
*3F
R C
UT
OF
F (
CO
OL)
* 80
G C
UT
OF
F (
CO
OL)
*80
B C
UT
OF
F (
CO
OL)
*80
H P
OS
ITIO
N*
3FV
PO
SIT
ION
*3F
FA
CT
RE
SE
T
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
AD
JUS
T M
OD
E
SE
RV
ICE
SU
B B
RT
WH
ITE
BA
L R
DR
V (
CO
OL)
48 B
DR
V (
CO
OL)
37 R
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)
80 G
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)80
B C
UT
OF
F (
CO
OL)
80H
PO
SIT
ION
12V
PO
SIT
ION
00F
AC
T R
ES
ET
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
Sel
ect S
ER
VIC
Ean
d pr
ess
E k
ey
Pre
ss E
XIT
key
(OS
D O
FF
)
CU
T O
FF
AD
JUS
T M
OD
E
AD
JUS
T M
OD
E
SE
RV
ICE
SU
B B
RT
WH
ITE
BA
L R
DR
V (
CO
OL)
3F B
DR
V (
CO
OL)
3F R
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)
80 G
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)80
B C
UT
OF
F (
CO
OL)
80H
PO
SIT
ION
3FV
PO
SIT
ION
3FF
AC
T R
ES
ET
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
ME
NU
Sel
ect S
ER
VIC
Ean
d pr
ess
E k
ey
Pre
ss E
XIT
key
R D
RV
3F
ME
NU
ME
NU
Sel
ect S
ER
VIC
Ean
d pr
ess
E k
ey
Pre
ss E
XIT
key
BR
IGH
TN
ES
S 8
0
Pre
ss F
E to
adj
ust
VID
EO
SE
TT
ING
S(1
)C
ON
TR
AS
T :
MIN
(2)
CO
LOR
: M
IN
VID
EO
SE
TT
ING
S(1
)C
ON
TR
AS
T :
MA
X(2
)C
OLO
R,T
INT,
SH
AR
P,B
RIG
HT:
CE
NE
R(3
)C
OLO
R T
EM
P :
CO
OL
AD
JUS
T(1
)P
ress
G H
to s
elec
t the
G D
RV
.,R
DR
V.,
R C
UT
, G C
UT
, B C
UT
.(I
nitia
l pos
ition
G/B
DR
V).
G/B
DR
V, B
/R D
RV
sel
ect b
y th
e D
R R
and
DR
BG
.(2
)P
ress
F E
to a
djus
t.
WH
ITE
BA
LAN
CE
AD
J. M
OD
E
PO
WE
R +
INP
UT
Onl
y ad
just
in c
ool m
ode.
Onl
y ad
just
in c
ool m
ode.
Onl
y ad
just
in c
ool m
ode.
*: A
djus
tabl
e da
taot
hers
: Fi
xed
data
(be
care
ful n
ot to
cha
nge)
A
SU
B B
RIG
HT
AD
J. M
OD
E
G H
PAGE 01-21
AD
JUS
T M
OD
ES
ER
VIC
ES
UB
BR
T*
WH
ITE
BA
L*G
DR
V (
CO
OL)
*3F
R D
RV
(C
OO
L)*
3FR
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80G
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80B
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80H
PO
SI (
V/P
)*3F
47 V
D-P
OS
(F
C)*
3FF
AC
T R
ES
ET
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
TC
H U
/D, I
NP
UT
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
SE
LEC
TS
ELE
CT
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
WA
RM
, NT
SC
, ST
D A
DJ
MO
DE
1.P
ress
G H
to s
elec
t the
G D
RV
or
R D
RV
.2.
Pre
ss s
elec
t to
chan
ge th
e C
OO
LRW
AR
MR
NT
SC
RC
OO
L m
ode.
Adj
ust o
n ea
ch m
ode,
but c
anno
t adj
ust o
n th
e C
OO
L m
ode.
3.W
AR
M a
nd N
TS
C m
ode
data
is o
ffset
dat
aba
sed
on th
e C
OO
L m
ode
data
.4.
Do
not a
djus
t WH
ITE
BA
LAN
CE
in W
AR
M o
rN
TS
C m
ode.
Adj
ust i
n C
OO
L m
ode
only
. CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
SE
LEC
T
ME
NU
GH
SE
LEC
T
AD
JUS
T M
OD
ES
ER
VIC
ES
UB
BR
T*
WH
ITE
BA
L*G
DR
V (
CO
OL)
*48
R D
RV
(C
OO
L)*
4FR
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80G
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80B
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80H
PO
SI (
V/P
)*3F
47 V
D-P
OS
(F
C)*
3FF
AC
T R
ES
ET
AD
JUS
T M
OD
ES
ER
VIC
ES
UB
BR
T*
WH
ITE
BA
L*G
DR
V (
CO
OL)
*4E
R D
RV
(C
OO
L)*
58R
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80G
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80B
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80H
PO
SI (
V/P
)*3F
47 V
D-P
OS
(F
C)*
3FF
AC
T R
ES
ET
AD
JUS
T M
OD
ES
ER
VIC
ES
UB
BR
T*
WH
ITE
BA
L*G
DR
V (
CO
OL)
*3F
R D
RV
(C
OO
L)*
3FR
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80G
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80B
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80H
PO
SI H
*3F
47 V
D-P
OS
(F
C)H
*3F
FA
CT
RE
SE
T
AD
JUS
T M
OD
ES
ER
VIC
ES
UB
BR
T*
WH
ITE
BA
L*G
DR
V (
CO
OL)
*3F
R D
RV
(C
OO
L)*
3FR
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80G
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80B
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80H
PO
SI*
3F
47 V
D-P
OS
(F
C)*
3FF
AC
T R
ES
ET
AD
JUS
T M
OD
ES
ER
VIC
ES
UB
BR
T*
WH
ITE
BA
L*G
DR
V (
CO
OL)
*3F
R D
RV
(C
OO
L)*
3FR
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80G
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80B
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80H
PO
SI H
*
3F47
VD
-PO
S (
FC
)H*
3FF
AC
T R
ES
ET
AD
JUS
T M
OD
ES
ER
VIC
ES
UB
BR
T*
WH
ITE
BA
L*G
DR
V (
CO
OL)
*3F
R D
RV
(C
OO
L)*
3FR
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80G
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80B
CU
TO
FF
(C
OO
L)*
80H
PO
SI*
3F
47 V
D-P
OS
(F
C)*
3FF
AC
T R
ES
ET
Oth
er M
ode
1080
i thr
outh
mod
eO
ther
Mod
e10
80i t
hrou
th m
ode
SE
LEC
T
Onl
y ad
just
in c
ool m
ode.
VD
Pos
ition
Adj
Mod
eP
ress
F E
to a
djus
tH
Pos
ition
Adj
Mod
eP
ress
F E
to a
djus
t
PAGE 01-22
AD
JUS
T M
OD
E
YU
VS
EL
RE
SE
T3D
YC
RE
SE
T1H
V/C
RE
SE
TF
LEX
RE
SE
T2H
V/P
RE
SE
TB
BE
RE
SE
TM
EM
OR
Y IN
ITI2
CO
PE
N
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
Sam
e da
ta o
fM
ain
and
Sub
AD
JUS
T M
OD
E T
A12
70-M
TIN
T (
TV
)3C
TO
FF
0 (T
V)
00T
OF
Q (
TV
)00
SU
B C
NT
0FS
UB
CLR
0F
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
} }
Pre
ss G
H to
sel
ect.
Pre
ss E
to s
et to
the
initi
al d
ata
of e
ach
devi
ce.
Pre
ss G
H to
sel
ect.
Pre
ss E
to s
et to
the
initi
al o
r fa
ctor
yse
tting
s.
MEN
UG
H
Item
Dev
ice
YUVS
ELC
XA21
41Q
3DYC
uPD
6408
21H
V/C
TA12
70B
FFL
EXFL
EX C
ON
T.2H
V/P
TA13
16A
NB
BE
NJW
1132
AD
JUS
T M
OD
E T
A12
70-S
TIN
T (
TV
)3C
TO
FF
0 (T
V)
00T
OF
Q (
TV
)00
SU
B C
NT
0FS
UB
CLR
0F
SP
LIT
/SIN
GLE
MO
DE
+P
iP C
H
SU
RF
mod
e(A
NT
A o
nly)
SP
LIT
mod
e
SIN
GLE
mod
e(N
TS
C o
nly)
NO
RM
AL
mod
e
PIP
ON
/OF
Fke
y
PIP
Mod
eke
y
PIP
Mod
eke
y
PIP
Mod
e ke
y
AD
JUS
T M
OD
EC
XA
2151
MA
T O
UT
0H
WID
TH
0V
TC
1H
SE
P0
HS
MA
SK
1
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
AD
JUS
T M
OD
EC
XA
2151
MA
CR
O1
GA
IN S
EL
0C
BG
AIN
7C
RG
AIN
7Y
GA
IN7
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
ME
NU
GH
ME
NU
GH
AD
JUS
T M
OD
EU
PD
6408
2D
YG
A09
DC
GA
06V
AP
GA
00V
AP
IN0B
YH
CO
R00
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
ME
NU
G
H
ME
NU
G
H
ME
NU
GH
PAGE 01-23
SE
LEC
T
ME
NU
G
H
FLE
X C
ON
T48
0i39
HH
PF
100
41 V
-CR
G00
42 H
-CR
G00
43 V
-EN
H02
44 H
-EN
H00
96 Y
VH
EN
H0B
100
CV
HE
NH
1271
YV
-EN
H00
87 Y
H-E
NH
07 480i
mod
e
FLE
X C
ON
T48
0P39
HH
PF
100
41 V
-CR
G00
42 H
-CR
G00
43 V
-EN
H02
44 H
-EN
H00
96 Y
VH
EN
H0B
100
CV
HE
NH
1271
YV
-EN
H00
87 Y
H-E
NH
07 480P
mod
e
FLE
X C
ON
T10
80i
39 H
HP
F1
0041
V-C
RG
0042
H-C
RG
0043
V-E
NH
0044
H-E
NH
0096
YV
HE
NH
00 1
00 C
VH
EN
H12
71 Y
V-E
NH
0087
YH
-EN
H00 10
80i m
ode
FLE
X C
ON
T72
0P39
HH
PF
100
41 V
-CR
G00
42 H
-CR
G00
43 V
-EN
H02
44 H
-EN
H00
96 Y
VH
EN
H0B
100
CV
HE
NH
1271
YV
-EN
H00
87 Y
H-E
NH
07 720P
mod
e
FLE
X C
ON
TS
PLI
T39
HH
PF
100
41 V
-CR
G00
42 H
-CR
G00
43 V
-EN
H02
44 H
-EN
H00
96 Y
VH
EN
H0B
100
CV
HE
NH
1271
YV
-EN
H00
87 Y
H-E
NH
07 SP
LIT
mod
e
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
FLE
X C
ON
TN
TS
C39
HH
PF
100
41 V
-CR
G00
42 H
-CR
G00
43 V
-EN
H02
44 H
-EN
H00
96 Y
VH
EN
H0B
100
CV
HE
NH
1271
YV
-EN
H00
87 Y
H-E
NH
07N
TS
C/S
ING
LE/S
UR
F/S
TR
OB
E m
ode
SE
LEC
TS
ELE
CT
SE
LEC
TS
ELE
CT
SE
LEC
T
FLE
X C
ON
T48
0i94
CH
-EN
H0F
68 Y
V-C
LP00
84 Y
H-C
LP00
97 Y
V-N
LP00
98 Y
H-N
LP0A
83 Y
H-F
RQ
0091
CH
-FR
Q02
70 Y
V-L
T1
00 480i
mod
e
FLE
X C
ON
T48
0P94
CH
-EN
H0F
68 Y
V-C
LP00
84 Y
H-C
LP00
97 Y
V-N
LP00
98 Y
H-N
LP0A
83 Y
H-F
RQ
0091
CH
-FR
Q02
70 Y
V-L
T1
00 480P
mod
e
FLE
X C
ON
T10
80i
94 C
H-E
NH
0F68
YV
-CLP
0084
YH
-CLP
0097
YV
-NLP
0098
YH
-NLP
0083
YH
-FR
Q00
91 C
H-F
RQ
0270
YV
-LT
100 10
80i m
ode
FLE
X C
ON
T72
0P94
CH
-EN
H0F
68 Y
V-C
LP00
84 Y
H-C
LP00
97 Y
V-N
LP00
98 Y
H-N
LP0A
83 Y
H-F
RQ
0091
CH
-FR
Q02
70 Y
V-L
T1
00 720P
mod
e
FLE
X C
ON
TS
PLI
T94
CH
-EN
H0F
68 Y
V-C
LP00
84 Y
H-C
LP00
97 Y
V-N
LP00
98 Y
H-N
LP0A
83 Y
H-F
RQ
0091
CH
-FR
Q02
70 Y
V-L
T1
00 SP
LIT
mod
e
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
FLE
X C
ON
TN
TS
C94
CH
-EN
H0F
68 Y
V-C
LP00
84 Y
H-C
LP00
97 Y
V-N
LP00
98 Y
H-N
LP0A
83 Y
H-F
RQ
0091
CH
-FR
Q02
70 Y
V-L
TI
00N
TS
C/S
ING
LE/S
UR
F/S
TR
OB
E m
ode
SE
LEC
TS
ELE
CT
SE
LEC
TS
ELE
CT
ME
NU
G
HM
EN
U
G H
ME
NU
G
HM
EN
U
G H
ME
NU
G
H
SE
LEC
T
SE
LEC
TM
EN
U
G H
ME
NU
G
H
PAGE 01-24
SE
LEC
T
ME
NU
G
H
FLE
X C
ON
T48
0i86
YH
-LT
I01
93 C
H-C
TI
0195
Y-C
RG
0064
YN
R-I
N04
73 C
NR
-IN
0480
YN
RP
AS
0088
CN
RP
AS
0240
RE
AD
-F0F
55 L
INE
-I00 48
0i m
ode
FLE
X C
ON
T48
0P86
YH
-LT
I01
93 C
H-C
TI
0195
Y-C
RG
0064
YN
R-I
N04
73 C
NR
-IN
0480
YN
RP
AS
0088
CN
RP
AS
0240
RE
AD
-F0F
55 L
INE
-I00 48
0P m
ode
FLE
X C
ON
T10
80i
86 Y
H-L
TI
0093
CH
-CT
I01
95 Y
-CR
G00
64 Y
NR
-IN
0473
CN
R-I
N04
80 Y
NR
PA
S00
88 C
NR
PA
S02
40 R
EA
D-F
0F55
LIN
E-I
00 1080
i mod
e
FLE
X C
ON
T72
0P86
YH
-LT
I01
93 C
H-C
TI
0195
Y-C
RG
0064
YN
R-I
N04
73 C
NR
-IN
0480
YN
RP
AS
0088
CN
RP
AS
0240
RE
AD
-F0F
55 L
INE
-I00 72
0P m
ode
FLE
X C
ON
TS
PLI
T86
YH
-LT
I01
93 C
H-C
TI
0195
Y-C
RG
0064
YN
R-I
N04
73 C
NR
-IN
0480
YN
RP
AS
0088
CN
RP
AS
0240
RE
AD
-F-
-55
LIN
E-I
00 SP
LIT
mod
e
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
FLE
X C
ON
TN
TS
C86
YH
-LT
I01
93 C
H-C
TI
0195
Y-C
RG
0064
YN
R-I
N04
73 C
NR
-IN
0480
YN
RP
AS
0088
CN
RP
AS
0240
RE
AD
-F0F
55 L
INE
-I00
NT
SC
/SIN
GLE
/SU
RF
/ST
RO
BE
mod
e
SE
LEC
TS
ELE
CT
SE
LEC
TS
ELE
CT
SE
LEC
T
FLE
X C
ON
T48
0i65
YN
RR
DC
0174
CN
RR
DC
0089
CN
R-0
0027
FR
MB
RT
6011
MV
W-P
H07
18 S
VW
-PH
0714
MH
S-H
P0F
21 S
HS
-HP
0F23
V-P
OS
1F50
HD
-PO
S3F 48
0i m
ode
FLE
X C
ON
T48
0P65
YN
RR
DC
0174
CN
RR
DC
0089
CN
R-0
0027
FR
MB
RT
6011
MV
W-P
H05
18 S
VW
-PH
0514
MH
S-H
P0F
21 S
HS
-HP
0F23
V-P
OS
1F50
HD
-PO
S3F 48
0P m
ode
FLE
X C
ON
T10
80i
65 Y
NR
RD
C00
74 C
NR
RD
C00
89 C
NR
-000
27 F
RM
BR
T60
11 M
VW
-PH
0418
SV
W-P
H04
14 M
HS
-HP
0F21
SH
S-H
P0F
23 V
-PO
S1F
50 H
D-P
OS
3F 1080
i mod
e
FLE
X C
ON
T72
0P65
YN
RR
DC
0074
CN
RR
DC
0089
CN
R-0
0027
FR
MB
RT
6011
MV
W-P
H06
18 S
VW
-PH
0614
MH
S-H
P0F
21 S
HS
-HP
0F23
V-P
OS
1F50
HD
-PO
S3F 72
0P m
ode
FLE
X C
ON
TS
PLI
T65
YN
RR
DC
0174
CN
RR
DC
0089
CN
R-0
0027
FR
MB
RT
6011
MV
W-P
H-
-18
SV
W-P
H-
-14
MH
S-H
P-
-21
SH
S-H
P-
-23
V-P
OS
1F50
HD
-PO
S3F S
PLI
T m
ode
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
FLE
X C
ON
TN
TS
C65
YN
RR
DC
0174
CN
RR
DC
0089
CN
R-0
0027
FR
MB
RT
6011
MV
W-P
H07
18 S
VW
-PH
0714
MH
S-H
P0F
21 S
HS
-HP
0F23
V-P
OS
1F50
HD
-PO
S3F
NT
SC
/SIN
GLE
/SU
RF
/ST
RO
BE
mod
e
SE
LEC
TS
ELE
CT
SE
LEC
TS
ELE
CT
ME
NU
G
HM
EN
U
G H
ME
NU
G
HM
EN
U
G H
ME
NU
G
H
SE
LEC
T
SE
LEC
T
ME
NU
G
H
ME
NU
G
H
FLE
X C
ON
T48
VB
LK-T
7F49
VB
LK-B
7F51
HB
LK-R
8852
HB
LK-L
7A35
FR
MT
OP
0736
FR
MB
TM
0737
FR
MR
GT
0738
FR
MLF
T07
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
SE
LEC
T
FLE
X C
ON
T10
80i P
AS
S48
VB
LK-T
7F49
VB
LK-B
7F51
HB
LK-R
7F52
HB
LK-L
7F35
FR
MT
OP
0736
FR
MB
TM
0737
FR
MR
GT
0738
FR
MLF
T07 10
80i p
ass
ME
NU
G
H
FLE
X C
ON
T12
0 T
V/C
INE
0112
1 T
/C D
ET
0712
2 T
/C U
NL
0112
3 T
/C L
CK
0312
6 T
/C A
RE
0512
7 T
/C C
BR
0712
8 T
/C Y
BR
0712
9 IP
MO
DE
0013
0 C
-IN
T00
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
ME
NU
G
HM
EN
U
G H
PAGE 01-25
SE
LEC
T
ME
NU
G
H
FLE
X C
ON
T48
0i/4
80P
SH
AR
P28
AP
AC
ON
01C
LT01
SR
T G
A00
SR
T F
Q03 48
0i/4
80P
mod
e
FLE
X C
ON
T72
0P/1
080i
SH
AR
P1C
AP
AC
ON
00C
LT01
SR
T G
A00
SR
T F
Q03 72
0P/1
080i
mod
e
FLE
X C
ON
T10
80i P
AS
SS
HA
RP
1CA
PA
CO
N00
CLT
01S
RT
GA
00S
RT
FQ
03 1080
i pas
s m
ode
FLE
X C
ON
TS
PLI
TS
HA
RP
28A
PA
CO
N01
CLT
01S
RT
GA
00S
RT
FQ
03 SP
LIT
mod
e
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
FLE
X C
ON
TN
TS
CS
HA
RP
30A
PA
CO
N01
CLT
01S
RT
GA
00S
RT
FQ
03N
TS
C/S
ING
LE/S
UR
F/S
TR
OB
E m
ode
SE
LEC
TS
ELE
CT
SE
LEC
TS
ELE
CT
SE
LEC
T
TA
1316
SD
TV
CO
LOR
54T
INT
3DR
-Y P
H02
R/B
GA
0DG
-Y P
H05
G/B
GA
00 SD
TV
mod
e
TA
1316
HD
TV
CO
LOR
4FT
INT
41R
-Y P
H00
R/B
GA
0AG
-Y P
H05
G/B
GA
00 HD
TV
mod
e
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
TA
1316
NT
SC
CO
LOR
54T
INT
3BR
-Y P
H02
R/B
GA
0CG
-Y P
H02
G/B
GA
00 NT
SC
mod
e
SE
LEC
T
ME
NU
G
H
SE
LEC
T
SE
LEC
TM
EN
U
G H
ME
NU
G
H
}
Cen
ter
Adj
ust
PAGE 01-26
ME
NU
G H
TA
1316
RG
B A
CL
01R
GB
BR
T3F
RG
B C
NT
7FO
SD
AC
L00
OS
D B
RT
02O
SD
CN
T03
R R
EF
01G
/B R
EF
01S
UB
CN
T15
TA
1316
DC
RR
SW
00C
OLO
RG
00Y
C G
A1
00Y
C G
A2
00V
SM
PH
03V
SM
GA
07
TA
1316
YO
UT
G00
WP
L A
P00
Y D
TL
10W
P P
NT
07W
P G
A00
HI B
RT
00W
PS
01C
DE
00
TA
1316
WP
L LE
00W
PL
F0
07D
AB
L P
N00
DA
BL
GA
07A
BL
PN
07A
BL
GA
05D
YN
C P
NT
00D
YN
C G
A00
ST
AT
GA
00
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
TA
1316
CLP
PH
S00
SC
P S
W01
HB
P P
HS
00V
BLK
PH
S1F
PR
ES
PH
10F
PR
ES
PH
200
ME
NU
G H
ME
NU
G H
ME
NU
G H
ME
NU
G H
NJW
1132
BB
E H
IGH
07B
BE
LO
W07
V C
HIP
RA
TIN
GP
OLL
ING
0FT
IME
OU
T05
ST
AT
US
02A
FC
/CLO
CK
TE
ST
OS
D P
OS
ITIO
N
H P
OS
IO
EV
PO
SI
00
CH
U/D
, IN
PU
T
TA
1316
DC
PN
T00
DC
RA
T00
DC
LM
T00
BS
P04
AP
L/B
S00
BLC
00B
DL
00B
S A
RE
01S
TR
K00
Sel
ect O
SD
PO
SI a
ndpr
ess
E k
ey
ME
NU
G
H
ME
NU
G
H
}
Pre
ss E
XIT
key
TE
ST
CX
A21
51 (
MA
IN)
H**
V**
Inpu
t400
Inpu
t500
ME
NU
G H
}
32m
s*P
OLL
ING
DA
TA
FR
OM
RA
TIN
G O
FF
DE
TE
CT
IVE
CO
UN
T
CX
A21
51 R
EA
D M
OD
EH
CO
UN
T D
AT
AV
CO
UN
T D
AT
A
ME
NU
G H
SE
LF-D
IAG
NO
SIS
RE
SE
T S
TA
RT
00R
EM
OT
E P
OW
ER
00M
AT
RIX
PO
WE
R00
RE
MO
TE
ME
M IN
IT00
MA
TR
IX M
EM
INIT
00A
DJU
ST
ME
M IN
IT00
AD
JUS
T F
AC
RE
SE
T00
EE
P R
EA
D E
RR
OR
00E
EP
WR
ITE
ER
RO
R00
LAS
T E
VE
NT
0000
CC
D S
LIC
E13
CC
D L
PF
03
ME
NU
G
H
A
DP-1X CHASSIS
POWER SUPPLY INFORMATION
SECTION 2
DP-1X POWER SUPPLY ON / OFF (STAND-BY) OPERATION EXPLANATION
PAGE 02-01
Power On and Off Diagram explanation: (See DP-1X Power On/Off Diagrams for details) This power supply runs all the time when the AC is applied. The use of the power supply creating Stand By Volt-age supplies eliminates the need for a Stand-By transformer. The following explanation will describe the Turning ON and OFF of the projection television. The Microprocessor I001 generates the ON-OFF control signal from pin (53). The logic states of this pin are High = On and Low = Off. When the set is turned On, the high from pin (53) is routed to the Relay Drivers Q003 and Q004. This turns on Q003 and it’s collector goes low which turns off Q004 and it’s collector goes High. This On/Off from the Relay Drivers will perform the following : • Turns on the Shut Down “Power Shorted” detection circuit, Q917 and Q919. • Turns on the Relay S901 through Q914 providing AC to the Deflection Power Supply on the Power/
Deflection PWB.
Continued on Next Page
SOME SHUT-DOWN DETECTION CIRCUITS SHUT OFF DURING STAND-BY: (See Figure 1) During Stand-By, some of the secondary voltages produced are turned off, except the STBY voltages after regu-lation. This could cause a potential problem with the Short Detection circuits for shutdown. To avoid accidental shut down, Q917 also controls the activity of Q919. During Stand-By, the output from the Microprocessor On/Off pin (53) is Low. This Low is inverted by Q003 and inverted again by Q004 and this Low is routed to the base of Q917 turning it Off. This turns off Q917 because it’s base is pulled Low through D927. This action turns off Q917. When Q917 is off, it doesn’t supply emitter voltage to the Emitter of Q919. The base of Q919 is con-nected to 3 Low Detection inputs from [PROTECT 1], (See the Sub Power Supply Shut Down Circuit explana-tion and diagram for further details). PROTECT 1 monitors IC02, 3 & 4 on the Signal PWB. IC02 produces 5.5V, IC03 produces 3.3V, and IC04 pro-duces 2.5V. NOTE: PROTECT 1 will never go below 2.2 V, unless the 2.2V line is shorted. NOTE: If the 5.5V or the 3.3V regulator OPENS, the set will not go into shut down, they must have a short to produce a shut down input on PROTECT 1. The set will shut down after the Screens go excessively bright, but this is from the 115V over current sensor, not PROTECT 1. When the power supply is in Stand By, the Short Detection circuit could activate. By turning off Q919, no acci-dental shut down operation can occur.
AT POWER ON, THE DEFLECTION CIRCUIT IS ENERGIZED: (See Figure 2) When the Microprocessor outputs a High from pin 53 when power is turned ON, the high is inverted by Q003 to a LOW. This low is inverted by Q004 to a HIGH and routed through the PQS1 connector pin 2. This high is routed through R954, R951, D926 to the base of Q914. This transistor turns ON and it’s collector goes LOW.
R958
R957
Q917 Q919D942 To Base of
Q918 OVPR959
Protect 1
Stby +5V
C942
C944
Power/Deflection PWB
D927
PQS1
2
On = LoOff = Hi
53PowerOn/Off
I001 Micro
Q003
Q004
3 Shutdown Inputs,Active Low
On = LoOff = Hi
Figure 1
DP-1X POWER SUPPLY ON / OFF (STAND-BY) OPERATION EXPLANATION
PAGE 02-02
Continued From Previous Page
This low is the Ground return for the Relay S901. The B+ for the primary of the relay is the SBY +5V generated by the switching transformer pin 15, rectified by D920, filtered by C935, L915, and C936. (See DP-1X Power On/Off Diagrams for details). When the relay S901 turns on, the contacts close and AC is routed to the Deflection circuit power supply and the Deflection Power Supply is Energized.
R954
I001Microprocessor
53 PQS1
2
PowerOn/Off
ON = HiOFF = Lo
Q003 Q004
R951
OffOn
C940 R952
D926
Q914
4
3
1
2
S-901 Def. PowerSupply Relay
AC InPQD1
1AC for Def.Power Supply 2Power / Deflection PWB
D925
SBY+5V
R953
OffOn
Figure 2
DEFLECTION HORIZONTAL DRIVE CIRCUIT ACTIVATION: (IC01 Rainforest IC) When the set has AC applied, one of the switch pulses generated on the Sub Power PWB is the +11V pulse from pin 10 of the Switching Transformer I901. This +11V pulse is rectified by D919 and filtered by C929. This +11V DC voltage is then routed to the +9V regulator I906 pin 5. When the set is turned ON, the Horizontal Drive Power supply I906 is activated. This happens when pin 2 of I906 goes high with the Power On/Off control line from PQS1 pin 2. The +9V is output via pin 3 to the PQD2 connector pin 5. From here the +9V (HVCC) is routed through the Deflection PWB to the Signal PWB via PSD3 connector pin 11, through the coil LC03 to pin 19 of IC01 the Rainforest IC. When this voltage is applied to pin 19, the horizontal circuit inside the Rainforest IC is activated and a horizontal drive signal is output from pin 26. This H. Drive signal is routed through the PSD2 connector pin 5 to the base of the horizontal drive transistor Q709 on the Deflection PWB. The collector of Q709 produces a drive signal routed through the drive transformer T702 and output from pin 4 to the base of the Deflection Horizontal Output Transistor Q777 to begin driving the deflection circuit which in turn, activates the High Voltage circuit. Two transistors monitor the SW +9V line, Q707 and Q708. When the set is turned off, the H. Drive signal from IC01 could stop too soon. If this were to happen, the Horizontal output transistor Q777 would be damaged. To prevent this, if the SW +9V line drops, Q707 senses this because it’s base voltage drops. The base of Q708 rises and turns on, grounding the output from the H. Drive Transistor Q709. Q777 PROTECTION: Two transistors monitor the SW +9V line, Q707 and Q708. When the set is turned off, the H. Drive signal from IC01 could stop too soon. If this were to happen, the Horizontal output transistor Q777 would be damaged. To prevent this, if the SW +9V line drops, Q707 senses this because it’s base voltage drops. The base of Q708 rises and turns on, grounding the output from the H. Drive Transistor Q709.
DP
-1X
SE
RIE
S "
PO
WE
R O
N &
OF
F"
DIA
GR
AM
PAGE 02-03
I001
Mic
rop
roce
sso
r
53
PQ
S1
2
To
Bas
e of
Q91
8 (O
VP
)
Pow
erO
n/O
ffO
N =
Hi
OF
F =
Lo
Sub
Pow
er P
WB
Sig
nal P
WB
Def
lect
ion
Pow
er P
WB
IC01
H D
rive
IC
26
Def
.B+
Hoz
. Out
Sig
nal P
WB
VD
D3.
3V
Q02
5
6
3.3V
3.9V
3.3V
6154
Res
et
I002
Res
et2
3 1
3.3V
ST
BY
3.3V
Q00
3
SB
Y+
5VI9
06S
W+
9V
Reg
3
Q91
9Q
91743
12
S-9
01 D
ef. P
ow
erS
up
ply
Rel
ay
AC
InP
QD
1
1A
C fo
r D
ef.
Pow
er S
uppl
y2
Pow
er/
Def
lect
ion
PW
B
BO
TH
OF
F IN
ST
BY
OV
in S
TB
YQ
004
Off
On
Pro
tect
1A
C3
+6VO
ffO
n
55
PQ
D2
19
PS
D2
10
T90
1
+11
V
12T
901 +5V
SB
Y+
5V
11
11
SB
Y+
5V
Q91
4
Q91
6Q
915
11
PS
D3
PR
OT
EC
T
11 S
hut D
own
Inpu
ts fr
omD
efle
ctio
n
H D
rive
Q70
7Q
708
+28
VT
o B
ase
ofD
efle
ctio
n H
orz.
Out
put Q
777
T70
2
Q70
9
854 1
5
2O
ffO
n
11
PS
D3
SW
+9
.3V
D92
6
C94
0
R95
1
R95
2
D92
5
C94
1R
956
R95
5R
954
D92
7
R95
8
C94
2R
958
R95
9C
944
R97
2
D94
2
D93
1R
961
D94
1D
940
R97
3
D91
9
L915
DC
11
C93
6
C92
9
R0A
6
D02
6
D02
5C
061
C06
0
L003
C00
8
R00
9
D71
0
R73
3R
734
R74
8
R73
0
R73
7
C70
7C
708
R73
6D
709
R73
5C94
0
CC
18R
C36
LC03
RC
46
Off
On
DP-
1X S
UB
PO
WER
SU
PPLY
PR
OTE
CTI
ON
DIA
GR
AM
(SIG
NA
L) L
OW
VO
LTA
GE
PAGE 02-04
Rec
tifie
r+2
9V :
D91
0
Rec
tifie
r+5
V, D
920
Volta
geC
ontro
l5V D92
4
Switc
hing
Tran
sfor
mer
T901
FUSE
F901
1.6
A
Switc
hing
Con
trol
I901
Feed
back
I902
Prot
ect
I903
TV O
N/O
FFSw
itch
Q91
4
Prot
ecto
rQ
918
Ove
r Vol
tage
Det
ecto
r
Audi
o+2
8V
AC P
lug
Live
Col
d
AC In
put
Noi
se F
ilter
L901
, L90
2
Rec
tifie
rD
901
Fuse
F902
2A
AC C
lock
I904
REL
AYS9
01
ToD
efle
ctio
n Po
wer
Sup
ply
Prot
ectio
n Bl
ock
AC C
lock
60H
zTV
Mai
n O
N/O
FFO
N =
LO
/ O
FF =
Hi
Reg
ulat
orSW
+9.
3V :
I906
ZDSB
Y +5
V
D93
5 : >
7V
Audi
o SR
SD
912
: +29
Rel
ayS9
02
Line
Filt
erL9
05Pr
otec
t On/
Off
Switc
h: Q
915Q
916
Rec
tifie
r+1
1V, D
919
SW
+9.3
V
Reg
ulat
orSW
+9V
: D
947
SW
+9V
SW
+7V
On
Off
DEF
. Pro
tect
On
/ Off
On
Off
�������������
�������������
�������������
= G
REE
N L
.E.D
.
���������������
���������������
���������������
DP-1X SUB POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 02-05
(See Diagram on page 02-08) The sub power supply in the DP-1X chassis works very similar to the previous models, with some very significant exceptions. The use of the power supply creating the SBY+11V supply eliminates the need for a Stand-By transformer. The following explanation will describe the Sub Power Supply Shut Down Circuit. Power Supply Shutdown Explanation This chassis utilizes I901 as the Osc.\Driver \Switch for the sub power supply, just as the previous chassis have done. The Shutdown circuit, (cold ground side detection), removes I901 B+ via the following circuit, I903 (the Photo Coupler), which isolates the Hot ground from the Cold ground and couples the Shutdown signal to the Hot Ground side, Q902 on the hot ground side and Q901 which latches Q902 on. When Q902 is on, it removes B+ from pin (4) of I901 (the Vin pin). The Power Supply utilizes a Shutdown circuit that can trigger Q902 from 5 input sources. (1 of these Short Detec-tion circuits are not operational in Stand By mode). I903 is activated by a Low being applied to pin 2, which for-ward biases the internal LED. The light from this internal LED is then coupled to the receiver transistor. The re-ceiver transistor turns On and output a High from pin 3. This high is routed to the base of Q902 turning it On, which grounds out the Vin at pin (4) of I901, disabling the power supply. All of the Power Supply Shutdown circuitry can be broken down into the following groups; • Voltage Missing Detection • Voltage Too High Detection In the following explanation, the Shutdown circuits will be grouped. This will assist the Service Technician with trouble shooting the Chassis, by understanding these circuits and having the associated circuit routs, the technician can then “Divide and Conquer”. Voltage Loss or Excessive Load Detection (See Figure 1) The second most common circuit used is the Voltage Loss Detection circuit. This is a very simple circuit that detects a loss of a particular power supply and supplies a Pull-Down path for the base of a PNP transistor. This circuit consist of a diode connected by its cathode to a positive B+ power supply. Under normal conditions, the diode is reversed biases, which keeps the base of Q1 pulled up, forcing it OFF. However, if there is a short or excessive load on the B+ line, the diode in effect will have a LOW on its cathode, turning it ON. This will allow a current path for the base bias of Q1, which will turn it ON and generates a Shutdown Signal. B+ Voltage Too High Detection. (See Figure 2) In this circuit, a Zener diode is connected to a voltage divider or in some cases, directly to a B+ power supply. If the B+ voltage increases, the voltage at the voltage divider or the cathode of the zener diode will rise. If it gets to a predetermined level, the zener will fire. This action creates a Shutdown Signal.
(Continued on page 6)
Any PositiveB+ SupplyVoltage Too High
Detector
Shut-Down Signal Figure 2
Any PositiveB+ Supply
B+
Q1Shut-Down
Signal
VoltageLoss
Detector
Figure 1
DP-1X SUB POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 02-06
(Continued from page 5) DP-1X SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT: There are a total of 6 individual Shutdown inputs. In addition, there are 3 Hot Ground side Shutdown inputs that are specifically detected by the main power driver IC I901. These sensors circuits protect I901 from excessive current or over voltage. HOT GROUND SIDE SHUT DOWN SENSING CIRCUITS. (INTERNAL TO I901). LATCHED SHUT DOWN MONITORS: (AC must be removed to recover). 1. Pin 4 is monitored for Over Voltage at pin 4 of I901. 2. I901 itself is monitored for Excessive Heat. This block is labeled T.P.O. (Thermal Protection Overload). RECOVERING SHUT DOWN INPUT: (Driver IC will recover on it’s own when trouble is removed.) 3. Pin 5 besides being used as a regulation input, is also monitoring the low ohm resistors, R910, R911, and
R912. If these resistors have an excessive current condition caused by monitoring the current through the in-ternal Switch MOS FET, the voltage will rise and pin 5 has an internal Over Voltage detection op-amp. If this voltage rises enough to trigger this op-amp, the IC will stop producing a drive signal.
COLD GROUND SIDE SHUT DOWN SENSING CIRCUITS. (AC must be removed to recover). All of the Cold Ground side Shutdown detection circuits can be categorized by the two previously described circuits Voltage Loss Detection • Shorted STBY +3.3V (Q025) on Signal PWB through PROTECT 2 to (D938) on Sub Power Supply PWB • Shorted SW+2.5V (IC04) on Signal PWB through PROTECT 1 to (D940) on Sub Power Supply PWB • Shorted SW+3.3V (IC03) on Signal PWB through PROTECT 1 to (D940) on Sub Power Supply PWB • Shorted SW +5V (IC02) on Signal PWB through PROTECT 1 to (D940) on Sub Power Supply PWB Voltage Too High Detection • STBY +9V monitored by (D933, D934) • STBY +5V monitored by (D935, D936) If any one of these circuits activate the power supply will STOP, and create a Power Supply Shutdown Condition. SOME SHUTDOWN CIRCUITS ARE DEFEATED IN STANDBY MODE. (Set Off). As indicated in the Power On/Off circuit diagram explanation, 3 of the 6 shut down inputs are not active when the set is in standby. • Shorted SW +2.5V (IC04) on Signal PWB through Protect 1 to (D940) on Sub Power Supply PWB • Shorted SW +3.3V (IC03) on Signal PWB through Protect 1 to (D940) on Sub Power Supply PWB • Shorted SW +5V (IC02) on Signal PWB through Protect 1 to (D940) on Sub Power Supply PWB These SW voltage loss sensing circuits are defeated because the Shorted SW (Switched) power supply detection circuits are turned off in standby to prevent faults triggering of the shutdown circuit. Q919 supplies the high for shutdown if any of the voltage loss circuits become activated. Q919 requires emitter voltage to operated. Emitter voltage is supplied from the emitter of Q917. Q917s base is connected to the power on/off line. When the set is not on or turned off, the power on/off line goes Low. This Low pulls the cathode of D927 low, removing the base voltage of Q917 turning it OFF. This removes the emitter voltage from Q919 and this circuit can not function.
(Continued on page 7)
DP-1X SUB POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 02-07
(Continued from page 6) SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT: Shut down occurs when the shutdown Photo Coupler I903 is activated by pulling pin 2 low. When I903 is activated by pulling pin 2 low it give a ground path for the emitter of the LED inside I903. The light produced by turning on this LED turns on the internal photo receiver and generates a high out of pin (3). This high is routed to the base of Q902 turning it on. This grounds pin (4) of I901 removing Vin and the power supply stops working. The reason for the photo sensor I903 is to isolate hot and cold ground. B+ GENERATION FOR THE SUB POWER SUPPLY DRIVER IC: Vcc for the Driver IC is first generated by the AC input. This voltage is called Start Up Voltage. I901 requires 16V DC to operate normal. However, it will begin operation at 6.8V DC on pin (4) of I901. When AC is applied, AC is routed through the main fuse F901 (a 6 Amp fuse), then through the Line filters L901, and L902 to prevent any internal high frequency radiation for radiating back into the AC power line. After pass-ing the filters it arrives at the main full wave bridge rectifier D901 where it is converted to Raw 150V DC voltage to be supplied to the power supply switching transformer T901 pin (1). However, one leg of the AC is routed to a half wave rectifier D906 where it is rectified, routed through R903 and R904 (both a 22K ohm resistor), filtered by C910, clamped by a 30V Zener D902 and made available to pin (4) of I901 as start up voltage. When this voltage reaches 6.8Vdc, the internal Regulator of I901 is turned On and begins the operation of I901. When the power supply begins to operate by turning on and off the internal Switch MOS FET, the Raw 150V DC routed through T901, in on pin 1 (Drain) and out on pin 2 which is the Source. The Source of the internal Switch MOS FET is routed out of pin (2) through three low ohm resistors to hot ground. When the internal Switch MOS FET turns on, it causes the transformer to saturate building up the magnet field. When the internal Switch MOS FET turns off, the magnet field collapses and the EMF is coupled over to the secondary windings, as well as the drive windings. The drive windings at pin (5) produce a run voltage pulse which is rectified by D903, filtered by C909 then routed through R906, filtered again by C908 clamped by D902 and now becomes run voltage (16V) for I901.
I901Power IC
4
D906 D902
C908
D903
C909
5
6
T901
AC
1
23
I903
4 Stby +9V
Q919
C944
Q917
D927
On/Off
D942D940
D939
Protect 1PQS1
Pin 4Sw +5, 3.3 & 2.5V
12
11
DP-1X SIGNAL POWER SUPPLY (Low Voltage) SHUT-DOWN CIRCUIT
16.3V
PAGE 02-08
D920
D923
C910
Q901
monitors IC02, 3 & 4
C942
Q918
C943
Protect 2PQS1
Pin 3STBY +3.3Vmonitors Q025
D941
D936D935
PROTECTQ916
C941
Q915
C940
Q914
S901Relay
Stby +5V
PQS1Pin 2
PQD2
Pin 1
11 Shut Down Inputs4 from Deflection7 from Def. Power Supply
AC
L915
C935 C936
D934
D933
D926
D925
Signal PWB
Sub Power PWB orSignal Power PWB
OffOn
D938
16.97V60.2V
Stby +5V
Stby +5V
Vin
Q902
C945
C946
On Signal PWB
Sw +5, 3.3 & 2.5V
D909
Sw +5V
D910Sw +3.3V
Sw +2.5V
Circuit for Protect 1
From IC02
From IC03
From IC04
R9511K
R952
R957
R958
R954220
R95510K
R956
R960
R959R961
R972
R962
R925
R918
R923
R922R948
R0A7
RG49
R903 R904 R906
R907
DP-1X LED USED FOR VISUAL TROUBLE SHOOTING DESCRIPTION
PAGE 02-09
SUB POWER SUPPLY VISUAL LED. (See page 02-10 for Circuit Diagram) DP-15 and DP-14G Chassis has 1 Green LED on Sub Power Supply PWB. (Not the DP-17) This chassis utilizes 1 Green LED in the power supply cold side. The power supply operates it two different modes, Standby and Projection On mode. The LED is lit only in the Power On mode. During Standby with the AC applied and the TV; S-902 is not en-gaged. This turns off the Audio B+ and the LED does not light. • SRS Audio Front 29V Regulator +29V indicated by D912 Color GREEN LED USAGE: The Visual LED is very useful in Trouble Shooting. Without removing the back cover, some diagnostics can be made. With the set ON and by observing the operation of the Green LED, the technician can determine if the Sub Power Supply is generating Audio B+. The following will examine how the LED is illuminated. SRS Audio +29V Regulator indicated by D912. When the set is turned ON, the relay S-902 engages. This supplies a ground return path for pin (9) of the main switching transformer. This action allows generation of the pulse from pin (8) of T901. The SRS Audio +29V supply is generated from pin (8) of T901. This output is rectified by D910 and filtered by C915. The choke L912 adds further filtration and C917 removes high frequency switching noise. This supply is routed to the SRS Audio Output IC IJ01 via the connector PAQ1 pin 1 and 2. This voltage is what illuminates the Green Visual Trouble Shooting LED, D912 when the set is turned ON.
R90
7
Run
65V
I901
Driv
er/O
utpu
t IC
I903
AC
4
I903
Shu
tdow
nPh
otoc
oupl
er
DP-
15 a
nd D
P-14
G C
HA
SSIS
L.E
.D. (
VIS
UA
L TR
OU
BLE
DET
ECTI
ON
) DIO
DES
SIG
NA
L PO
WER
SU
PPLY
(1 T
otal
L.E
.D. f
or v
isua
l tro
uble
sens
ing
obse
rvat
ion)
3
1 2
STB
Y+7
V
GR
EEN
L.E
.D.
6 S
hut D
own
Inpu
ts(A
ctiv
e Lo
w)
PAGE 02-10
Q90
2Sh
utdo
wn
Switc
h
Star
t Up
83 ~
84K
Hz
From
Pin
8 T
901
D91
2
Osc
B+
SRS
+ 29
VA
udio
Fro
nt
T901
8
C91
3
L912
C91
5C
917
PAQ
1
1 2
16.3
V
16.9
V 0.0V
5V 4.3V
Q90
1
Q90
2Sh
utdo
wn
Latc
h
F903
4
7.5P
/P
34
S-90
2 A
udio
Pow
erSu
pply
Rel
ay
3 4A
udio
Gro
und
SW+7
V
19
2
R90
4R
903
D90
2C
908
R92
2
R92
3
R91
8
C90
9
D90
3
R93
2
D91
0
D90
6
DP-17 LED USED FOR VISUAL TROUBLE SHOOTING DESCRIPTION
PAGE 02-11
DP-17 SUB POWER SUPPLY VISUAL LED. (See Sub Power Supply Shut Down Circuit Diagram on next page) The DP-17 Chassis has 2 Green LEDs on Sub Power Supply PWB. The Sub Power Supply operates it two different modes, Standby and Projection On mode. The GREEN LEDs are lit ONLY in the Power On mode with the AC applied and the TV ON;
• FRONT Audio Front +29V Regulator indicated by D913 Color GREEN • REAR and CENTER Audio +29V Regulator indicated by D912 Color GREEN
LED USAGE: The Visual LED is very useful in Trouble Shooting. Without removing the back cover, some diagnostics can be made. By observing the operation of the Green LED, the technician can de-termine if the Sub Power Supply is running or not. The following will examine how the LED is illuminated. FRONT Audio Front + 29V Regulator indicated by D913 Color GREEN
• The Front Audio +29V supply is generated from pin (10) of T901. This output is recti-fied by D911 and filtered by C916. The choke L913 adds further filtration and C918 removes high frequency switching noise. This supply is routed to the Front Audio Out-put IC IJ01 via the connector PAQ2 pins (1) and (2).
REAR and CENTER Audio Front + 29V Regulator indicated by D912 Color GREEN • The Rear and Center Audio +29V supply is generated from pin (11) of T901. This output
is rectified by D910 and filtered by C915. The choke L912 adds further filtration and C917 removes high frequency switching noise. This supply is routed to the;
• Rear Audio Output IC IS15 via the connector PAQ1 pins (1) and (2) to the Surround PWB.
• Center Audio Output IC IJ02 via the connector PAQ2 pins (5) and (6) to the Signal PWB.
Run
65V
I901
Drive
r/Out
put I
CI90
3
ACR9
06
I903
Shu
tdow
nPh
otoc
oupl
er
DP-1
7 CHA
SSIS
L.E
.D. (
VISU
AL T
ROUB
LE D
ETEC
TION
) DIO
DES
SIGN
AL P
OWER
SUP
PLY
(2 T
otal
L.E.
D. fo
r visu
al tro
uble
sens
ing
obse
rvat
ion) 3
1 2
STBY
+7V
GRE
EN L
.E.D
. 6 S
hut D
own
Inpu
ts(A
ctive
Low
)
PAGE 02-12
Q902
Shut
down
Switc
h
Star
t Up
R903
R904
83 ~
84KH
z
D903
From
Pin
8 T
901
D906
D912
R932
C909
R918
Osc
B+
AC3
+ 29
V Re
ar
D910
T901
C913
L912
C915
C917
PAQ1 1 2
16.3
V
16.9
V
0.0V
5V 4.3V
D902
C908
Q902
Shut
down
Latc
h
F903
R922
47oh
m4
7.5P
/PR9
07
S-90
2 Aud
io P
ower
Supp
ly Re
lay3 4
SW+7
V1 2
34
GRE
EN L
.E.D
. D913
R933
D911
C914
L913
C916
C918
PAQ2 1 2
F909
3 4
1.95
A
1.30
A
7 8G
ndG
ndG
ndG
nd
Gnd
Gnd
4
101211
5 6
AC3
+ 29
V Fr
ont
AC3
+ 29
V Ce
nter
Audi
o G
roun
d
Audi
o G
roun
d
Audi
o G
roun
d
R923
10K
Q901
R925
C945
C946
DP-
1X D
EFLE
CTI
ON
PO
WER
SU
PPLY
DIS
TRIB
UTI
ON
DIA
GR
AM
PAGE 02-13
Prot
ecto
rFP
08: 1
0K
Prot
ecto
rFP
04: 1
0K
Prot
ecto
rFP
03: 7
K
Prot
ecto
rFP
02: 3
K
Prot
ecto
rFP
07: 5
KR
ectif
ier
+7V
:DP0
7
Rec
tifie
r-7
V:D
P08
Rec
tifie
r+1
1V:D
P08
Rec
tifie
r+2
8V:D
P12
Rec
tifie
r-2
8V:D
P13
Rec
tifie
r22
0V:D
P14
Rec
tifie
r+1
15V
:DP1
5
Reg
ulat
or+9
V: I
P04
Prot
ecto
rFP
05: 3
K
Switc
hing
Tran
sfor
mer
TP91
Fuse
FP01
: 1.
5A
Switc
hing
Con
trol
IP01
Feed
back
IP02
Vol
tage
Con
trol
+115
V: I
P03
IC P
ower
Mon
itor
LED
(RED
) :D
P06
DEF
. Pro
tect
On
/ Off
D Q
ZD
ZD
ZDD
efle
ctio
n+1
15V
Vid
eo :
+220
V
Con
ver:
-28V
Con
v / V
ert
+28V
Sign
al :
SW +
9V
DC
U :
SW -7
V
DP2
3: +
115V
QP0
2: >
1.4V
DP2
4 / D
P25:
>9V
DP2
1: <
24V
DP3
5: +
28V
DP2
1: >
32V
DP1
1: +
9VD
P29:
<12
V
DP3
7 : +
5V
DP1
7: >
133V
Hea
ter :
+6.3
V
Sub
Pow
er S
uppl
yB
lock
Live
Col
d
��������������
��������������
������������
������������
������������
D
On
Off
VT
:SW
+35V
DP2
6 : <
9V
������������
������������
������������
ZD
������������
������������
������������
Reg
ulat
or+6
.3V
: IP0
6
Reg
ulat
or+5
V: I
P05
������������
������������
Sign
al :
SW +
5V
���������������
���������������
���������������
= R
ed o
r Gre
en L
ED
Shor
tC
ircui
tD
etec
tor
DQ
orO
ver
Vol
tage
Det
ecto
rZD
Sub
Pow
erSW
+7V
DEFLECTION POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 02-14
DP-1X Def. Power Supply Shut Down Circuit Explanation: (See page 02-19 for Circuit Diagram) POWER SUPPLY SHUTDOWN EXPLANATION This chassis utilizes IP01 as the Osc.\Driver \Switch for the Deflection power supply, just as the previous chassis have done. This IC is very similar to the previous versions. The Shutdown circuit, (cold ground side detection), is used to turn off the Relay S901 via the following circuit, Connector PQD2 pin 1, Q916 the Relay Driver on the Sub Power Supply PWB and the Relay S901 also on the Sub Power Supply PWB. The Power Supply utilizes a Shutdown circuit that produces a High from 12 different sources. When any of these inputs cause a high on the Connector PQD2 pin 1, the relay disengages, disabling the deflection power supply. All of the Power Supply Shutdown circuitry can be broken down into the following groups; • Voltage Missing Detection • Excessive Current Detection • Voltage Too High Detection In the following explanation, the Shutdown circuits will be grouped. This will assist the Service Technician with trouble shooting the Chassis, by understanding these circuits and having the associated circuit routs, the technician can then “Divide and Conquer”. COMMONLY USED SHUTDOWN DETECTION CIRCUITS EXCESSIVE CURRENT DETECTION. (See Figure 1) One very common circuit used in many Hitachi television products is the B+ Excessive Current Sensing circuit. In this circuit is a low ohm resistor in series with the particular power supply, (labeled B+ in the drawing). The value of this resistor is determined by the maximum current allowable within a particular power supply. In the case of Figure 1, the value is shown as a 0.47 ohm, however it could be any low ohm value. When the current demand increases, the voltage drop across the resistor increases. If the voltage drop is sufficient to reduce the voltage on the base of the transistor, the transistor will conduct, producing a Shutdown signal that is directed to the appropriate circuit. VOLTAGE LOSS OR EXCESSIVE LOAD DETECTION (See Figure 2) The second most common circuit used is the Voltage Loss Detection circuit. This is a very simple circuit that detects a loss of a particular power supply and supplies a Pull-Down path for the base of a PNP transistor. This circuit consist of a diode connected by its cathode to a positive B+ power supply. Under normal conditions, the diode is reversed biases, which keeps the base of Q1 pulled up, forcing it OFF. However, if there is a short or excessive load on the B+ line, the diode in effect will have a LOW on its cathode, turning it ON. This will allow a current path for the base bias of Q1, which will turn it ON and generates a Shutdown Signal.
(Continued on page 15)
0.47B+
Shut-Down Signal
Current Detection Resistor
Figure 1
Any PositiveB+ Supply
B+
Q1Shut-Down
Signal
VoltageLoss
Detector
Figure 2
DEFLECTION POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 02-15
(Continued from page 14) B+ VOLTAGE TOO HIGH DETECTION. (See Figure 3) In this circuit, a Zener diode is connected to a voltage divider or in some cases, directly to a B+ power supply. If the B+ voltage increases, the voltage at the voltage divider or the cathode of the zener diode will rise. If it gets to a predetermined level, the zener will fire. This action creates a Shutdown Signal. NEGATIVE VOLTAGE LOSS DETECTION. (See Figure 4) The purpose of the Negative Voltage Loss detection circuit is to compare the negative voltage with its’ counter part positive voltage. If at any time, the negative voltage drops or disappears, the circuit will produce a Shutdown signal. In Figure 5, there are two resistors of equal value. One to the positive voltage, (shown here as +12V) and one to the negative voltage, (shown here as -12V). At their tie point, (neutral point), the voltage is effectually zero (0) volts. If however, the negative voltage is lost due to an excessive load or defective negative voltage regulator, the neutral point will go positive. This in turn will cause the zener diode to fire, creating a Shutdown Signal. DP-1X SHUTDOWN CIRCUITS FOR THE DEFLECTION POWER SUPPLY There are a total of 12 Cold Ground Side individual Shutdown inputs. In addition, there are also 3 Hot Ground Side Shutdown inputs that are specifically detected by the main power driver IC, IP01 that protect it from excessive current or over voltage. All of the Shutdown detection circuits can be categorized by the four previously described circuits HOT GROUND SIDE SHUT DOWN SENSING CIRCUITS. (INTERNAL TO IP01). LATCHED SHUT DOWN MONITORS: (AC must be removed to recover). 1. Pin 4 is monitored for Over Voltage internal to IP01. 2. IP01 itself is monitored for Excessive Heat. This block is labeled T.P.O. (Thermal Protection Overload). RECOVERING SHUT DOWN INPUT: (Driver IC will recover on it’s own when trouble is removed.) 3. Pin 5 besides being used as a regulation input, is also monitoring the low ohm resistors, RP10, RP11, RP12,
and RP16, (All are 0.22 ohm resistors). If these resistors have an excessive current condition caused by monitoring the current through the internal Switch MOS FET, the voltage will rise and pin 5 has an internal Over Voltage detection op-amp. If this voltage rises enough to trigger this op-amp, the IC will stop producing a drive signal.
(Continued on page 16)
Any PositiveB+ SupplyVoltage Too High
Detector
Shut-Down Signal Figure 3
NegativeVoltage
LossDetector
+12V -12V
Shut-Down Signal
Figure 4
DEFLECTION POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 02-16
(Continued from page 15) COLD GROUND SIDE SHUT DOWN CIRCUITS: These Circuits are broken down into the appropriate categories as described earlier. VOLTAGE LOSS DETECTION
1. Shorted 220V (DP24 and DP25) Inverted by QP03 then through DP28 2. Shorted SW+35V (DP26) Inverted by QP03 then through DP28 3. Shorted 28V (DP27) Inverted by QP03 then through DP28 4. Shorted Deflection Transformer or Miss-operation (D707 and Q705) then through D705
NEGATIVE VOLTAGE LOSS DETECTION
5. -M28V Loss Detection (RP21, RP20, DP35, DP21 and DP22) EXCESSIVE CURRENT DETECTION
6. 115V Deflection Power Supply (RP24, QP02, DP18, DP19 and DP20) 7. 28V Vertical IC I601 Power Supply (R629, Q609, D608, and DP31)
VOLTAGE TOO HIGH DETECTION
8. Excessive High Voltage Detection (DH17, DH13 and DH15). Sensed from the 50P Voltage gener-ated from pin (5) of the Flyback Transformer TH01. Also, (DH14) sends a high command to the Horizontal Driver IC IH01 pin 7, to defeat Horizontal Drive Output if this voltage goes too high.
9. Side Pincushion failure generating a High. (D702, and D703). 10. Deflection B+ Too High. (DP17, RP26 and RP27). 11. SW +9V Voltage Too High Detection. (DP29 and DP30) 12. ABL Voltage Too High Detection. (DH15)
If any one of these circuits are activated, the power supply will STOP, and create a Power Supply Shutdown Condition. SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT: Shut down occurs when pin (1) of Connector PQD2 called PROTECT goes High. This High is routed to the Sub Power Supply PWB and is impressed on the base of the Relay Driver Transistor Q916 turning it On. When Q916 turns On, it removes the Power On High and the Relay S901 will disengage and remove the AC source from the Deflection Power Supply. DESCRIPTION OF EACH SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT: Please use the Commonly Used Shutdown Detection Circuits for the description of how the circuit works. VOLTAGE LOSS DETECTION 1. Shorted 220V (DP24 and DP25) Inverted by QP03 then through DP28
The cathode of DP24 is connected directly to the 220V line. If it shorts this circuit is activated and pulls the base of QP03 low and it’s collector goes high. This High is routed through DP28 and RP30 to pin (1) of Connector PQD2 called PROTECT and Shut Down occurs as described above.
2. Shorted SW+35V (DP27) Inverted by QP03 then through DP28 The cathode of DP27 is connected directly to the SW+35V line. If it shorts this circuit is activated and pulls the base of QP03 low and it’s collector goes high. This High is routed through DP28 and RP30 to pin (1) of Connector PQD2 called PROTECT and Shut Down occurs as described above.
3. Shorted 28V (DP27) Inverted by QP03 then through DP28 The cathode of DP27 is connected directly to the 28V line. If it shorts this circuit is activated and pulls the base of QP03 low and it’s collector goes high. This High is routed through DP28 and RP30 to pin (1) of Connector PQD2 called PROTECT and Shut Down occurs as described above.
(Continued on page 17)
DEFLECTION POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 02-17
(Continued from page 16) 4. Shorted Deflection Transformer or Miss-operation (D707 and Q705) then through D705
The Deflection circuit generates the actual Drive signal used in the High Voltage section. If a problem occurs in this circuit, the CRTs could be damaged or burnt. D707 is connected to R728 which is nor-mally passing the same pulse as used for generation of the H. Blanking signal. This pulse is generated off the Deflection Transformer T752. The pulse is rectified by D707. This rectified voltage is normally sent to the base of Q705 keeping it On and it’s collector Low. If the Deflection circuit fails to produce the pulses for rectification, the base voltage of Q705 disappears and the transistor turns Off generating a High on its collector. This output High is routed through D705, DP31 and RP30 to pin (1) of Connector PQD2 called PROTECT and Shut Down occurs as described above.
NEGATIVE VOLTAGE LOSS DETECTION Please use the Commonly Used Shutdown Detection Circuits for the description of how the circuit works. 5. -M28V Loss Detection (RP21, RP20, DP35, DP21 and DP22)
RP21 (15K ohm) is connected to the negative –M28V line and RP20 (15K ohm) and DP35 (LED) is connected to the positive +28V line. The Cathode of DP21 monitors the neutral point where these com-ponents are connected. If the negative voltage disappears, the zener DP21 fires. This high is routed through DP22 and RP30 to pin (1) of Connector PQD2 called PROTECT and Shut Down occurs as de-scribed above.
EXCESSIVE CURRENT DETECTION Please use the Commonly Used Shutdown Detection Circuits for the description of how the circuit works. 6. 115V Deflection Power Supply (RP24, QP02, DP18, DP19 and DP20)
If an excessive current condition of the Deflection B+ is detected by RP24 a 0.47 ohm resistor in the DP-15 or a 0.39 ohm in a DP-17 Chassis, the base of QP02 would drop. This would turn on QP02 and the high produced at the collector would fire zener DP18. This High would be routed through DP19 through DP20 and RP30 to pin (1) of Connector PQD2 called PROTECT and Shut Down occurs as described above.
7. Vertical 28V for IC I601 Power Supply (R629, Q604, D608, and DP31) If an excessive current condition of the Vertical B+ is detected by R629 a 0.68 ohm resistor, the base of Q609 would drop. This would turn on Q604 and the high produced at the collector would be routed through D608 through DP31 and RP30 to pin (1) of Connector PQD2 called PROTECT and Shut Down occurs as described above.
VOLTAGE TOO HIGH DETECTION Please use the Commonly Used Shutdown Detection Circuits for the description of how the circuit works. 8. Excessive High Voltage Detection (DH17, RH13, and DH15). Sensed from the Heater Voltage gener-
ated from pin (5) of the Flyback Transformer TH01. Also, (DH14) sends a high command to the Horizon-tal Driver IC IH02, to defeat Horizontal Drive Output if this voltage goes too high.
The Flyback Transformer TH01 generates a pulse called Heater. (Note: This does not go to the CRTs as heater voltage, its used for Excessive High Voltage Detection). If this voltage goes too high indicating an excessive High Voltage condition, the high would be impressed on the cathode of DH15. This high is routed DP31 and RP30 to pin (1) of Connector PQD2 called PROTECT and Shut Down occurs as de-scribed above. NOTE: DH17 is not in the DP15 chassis, it is only in the DP17 and DP14G. NOTE: LH06 coil has polarity, please check the “Dot” and confirm with the markings on the PWB. Failure to do so will result in intermittent “Shut Down”.
(Continued on page 18)
DEFLECTION POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 02-18
(Continued from page 17)
9. Side Pincushion failure generating a High. (D702, and D703) The Side Pin Cushion op-amp circuit is comprised of I701. If a problem occurred in this circuit it would create a High from pin 7 of I701. This high is impressed on the cathode of D702, and the zener would fire. This High will be routed through D703 through DP31 and RP30 to pin (1) of Connector PQD2 called PROTECT and Shut Down occurs as described previously.
10. Deflection B+ Too High. (DP17, RP26 and RP27 RP26 and RP27 form a voltage divider. The top side of RP27 is monitored by DP17. If the Deflection 115V voltage goes too high, the zener DP17 will fire. This high is routed through DP20 and RP30 to pin (1) of Connector PQD2 called PROTECT and Shut Down occurs as described previously.
11. SW +9V Power Supply Too High Detection. (DP29 and DP30) The SW +9V voltage is monitored by DP29. If this voltage goes too high, the zener DP29 will fire. This high is routed through DP30 and RP30 to pin (1) of Connector PQD2 called PROTECT and Shut Down occurs as described previously.
12. ABL Trigger Point Control. (RH32)
The ABL voltage is generated by the voltage drop across the ABL pull up resistors, (RH27 and RH28), according to the Flyback current demands. (See ABL circuit diagram for details). The ABL voltage is clamped at a maximum of 11V by (DH16). If the High Voltage fluctuates, this fluctuation manipulates the ABL voltage slightly to avoid an acciden-tal trigger and to avoid ABL from over controlling the video through the Rainforest IC.
I601
DP1X DEFLECTION POWER SUPPLY SHUTDOWN DIAGRAM
PAGE 02-19
Side Pin FailureHigh Det.
Deflection TransformerInoperative Det.
X-RAYPROTECT
+28V M-28V SW+9V
SW+35V
11
TP91
Deflection B+ (115V)Excessive Voltage Det.
Deflection B+ 115VQP02 0.47
Deflection B+ (115V)Excessive Current Det.
0.68
Flyback
Excessive VerticalCurrent Det.
5OP
1
6 78
Deflection B+ 115V V1
T752
-28V Loss Det. SW+9V TooHigh Det.
220V Short Det.
28V Short Det.
SW+35V Short Det.
1
PQD2
Off
Active
28V
220V
28V
29.01V
RP28 RP25
H.Blk
IH01OVP
CH17
CH19
10
TH01
R728
ABL TriggerPoint Control
RH32
PROTECTTo Sub Power
Supply
Q705
R720
SW+11V
C703
R718
R719
9.46V
Hi VoltH. Drive
7
Vertical Output
RP24
RP26
RP27
RP29
RP30
RP21
5LH06
Not in DP-15DH17
Excessive HiVoltage Det.
DP31
DH15
DP21 DP22
DP29
DP30
DH13 DH14
0.39 ohm DP-17
R629
DP20DP19
DP17DP18
CP36
D608
D703 D702DP35
RP20
DP27
DP26
DP24 DP25 DP28QP03
Q604
CP32
DP15
CP34
D707
Q706Q777
D705
RH25
DP-1X LEDs USED FOR VISUAL TROUBLE SHOOTING DESCRIPTION
PAGE 02-20
DEFLECTION POWER SUPPLY VISUAL LEDs. (See page 02-24 for Circuit Diagram) DP-1X Chassis has 4 Green and 1 Red LEDs on Deflection Power Supply PWB. This chassis utilizes 4 Green LEDs in the power supply cold side and a Red LED in the HOT side. POWER ON MODE: When the Power is turned ON, the LEDs lights;
1) DP06 Indicating Vcc applied to the Power Supply Driver IC IP01 pin 4 (Colored RED) 2) DP23 Indicating 115V Deflection B+ is available (Colored GREEN) 3) DP37 Indicating SW +5V B+ is available (Colored GREEN) 4) DP11 Indicating SW +9V B+ is available (Colored GREEN) 5) DP35 Indicating 28V B+ is available (Colored GREEN)
LED USAGE: The Visual LEDs are very useful in Trouble Shooting. Without removing the back cover, some diagnostics can be made. By observing the operation of the Red and Green LEDs, the technician can determine if the Deflection Power Supply is running or not. Also, by monitoring these LEDs at turn on, one can determine if a line is loaded. If an LED tries to light this goes off, or only lights dimly, this a loaded condition should be considered. Remember, this power supply doesn’t operate when the set is in Standby. The following will examine each LED and how they are lit. DP06 INDICATING VCC APPLIED TO THE POWER SUPPLY DRIVER IC IP01 PIN 4 (COLORED RED) This LED can be used to determine any of two different scenarios,
1. Is there B+ (Vcc) available to the Deflection Power Supply Driver IC? LED will be ON 2. Is the B+ (Vcc) available to the Deflection Power Supply Driver IC missing? LED will be OFF
As can be see, there is 1 scenario that can cause DP06 to be off, (1) Missing Start up voltage for the Driver IC. DP23 INDICATING 115V DEFLECTION B+ IS AVAILABLE (COLORED GREEN) This LED is connected directly to the 115 V deflection B+ line. If it’s lit, 115V is available. DP37 INDICATING SW +5V B+ IS AVAILABLE (COLORED GREEN) This LED is connected directly to the SW +5V B+ line. If it’s lit, +5V is available. DP11 Indicating SW +9V B+ is available (Colored GREEN) This LED is connected directly to the SW +9V B+ line. If it’s lit, +9V is available. DP35 Indicating 28V B+ is available (Colored GREEN) This LED is connected directly to the +28V B+ line. If it’s lit, +28V is available. B+ GENERATION FOR THE DEFLECTION POWER SUPPLY DRIVER IC. See Figure 1 START UP VOLTAGE GENERATION: Vcc for the Driver IC is first generated by the AC input. This voltage is called Start Up Voltage. IP01 requires 21V DC to operate normal. However, it will begin operation at 14V DC on pin (4) of IP01. When AC is applied by the relay on the Sub Power Supply R901, AC is routed through the connector PQD1. Then it arrives at the main full wave bridge rectifier DP01 where it is converted to DC voltage. One leg of the AC is routed through RP02 and RP03 (both a 3.9K ohm resistor), filtered by CP05, and made available to pin (4) of IP01 as start up voltage. The Red LED DP03 is illuminated by this power supply. When this voltage reaches 6.8Vdc, the internal Regulator of IP01 is turned On and begins the operation of IP01. RUN VOLTAGE GENERATION: After the transformer TP91 is started, a pulse is output from pin 8. This pulse is rectified by DP02, filtered by CP05 and takes over as Run Voltage (16.3V) at pin 4 of IP01.
(Continued on page 21)
DP-1X LEDs USED FOR VISUAL TROUBLE SHOOTING DESCRIPTION
PAGE 02-21
4
Sub Power Supply Hot
SwitchingTransformer
TP91
AC Input RectifierDP01
Cold
SwitchingControl
IP01
DP03RED LED
RelayR901
ConnectorPQD1
Power/Deflection PWB
RP02/03
3
��������������������������������������� Figure 1
(Continued from page 20) REGULATION: Figure 2 is a simplified diagram of the main Power Supply used in the DP-1X series Projection Television chassis. The primary control element of the power supply is IP01 (the Switching Regulator IC), in conjunction with transformer TP91. These two components, along with the supporting circuitry, comprise a closed loop regulation system. Unlike previous Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) Switch Mode Hitachi power supplies, the regulation system in the this chassis utilizes Frequency Control Modulation with an operational frequency of 60KHZ to 85KHZ, corresponding to full load and no load conditions, respectively. Primary regulation is provided by IP03, IP02 and into IP01, regulating the switching frequency at pin (3) of I901 via pin 1. Two primary secondary voltages are developed that are needed to sustain run and maintain regulation; 1. Run Voltage generated from pin (8 and 9) of TP91 rectified by DP02 and supplies run voltage to IP01 pin
(4) and 2. 115V Deflection Voltage generated from pin (11) of TP91, rectified by DP15 and used for regulation and
powering the Deflection and regulation circuitry.
TP91Switch ModeTransformer
IP02Opti-Coupler
115VDeflection B+
AC
1
3DrainIP01SwitchMode
ICRegulate
4
Raw 150V
Run V
IP03Regulator IC
DP23
DP06 HOT COLD
2Source
1 & 2
5 & 6
8
3 21
11
X2
Figure 2
DP-
1X C
HA
SSIS
L.E
.D. (
VIS
UA
L TR
OU
BLE
DET
ECTI
ON
) DIO
DES
DEF
LEC
TIO
N P
WB
4 G
REE
N L
.E.D
.s an
d 1
RED
L.E
.D.
(5 T
otal
L.E
.Ds.
for
visu
al tr
oubl
e se
nsin
g ob
serv
atio
n)
GREE
N L.
E.D.
s
115V
Def
lect
ion
B+
PAGE 02-22
IP01
Drive
r/Out
put I
C
IP02
4
AC
4
IP04
Reg
ulat
orPh
otoc
oupl
er
DP06
is a
RED
L.E.
D.OF
F =
IP01
B+
Miss
ing
May
be
caus
ed b
y Shu
t Dow
nor
Fau
lty S
tart
up C
ircuit
.ON
= IP
01 B
+ O
K
1 2
Vcc
16.3
Star
t Up
1
IP03
2Re
gulat
or
50KH
z Blk
Scre
en30
KHz W
hite
Scr
een
16.9
7V11
.9V
11.1
V
3.53
V
Run
From
Pin
8 T
P91
5.4V
P/P
65V
2.1V
SW+5
VSW
+9V
28V
RP03
RP02
DP03
DP23
DP37
DP11
DP35
RP32
RP32
RP31
RP44
RP19
RP20
RP05
DP02
CP05
RP09
RP13 DP
063
DP-1X CHASSIS
DEFLECTION INFORMATION
SECTION 3
Alvie W Rodgers
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DP-1X DEFLECTION BLOCK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 03-01
DEFLECTION BLOCK CIRCUIT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION: (See page 03-04 for Circuit Diagram) (Use the Horizontal Drive Circuit Diagram for more details) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When B+ arrives at the Rainforest IC IC01 pin (19), horizontal drive is output from pin (26). The drive signal is routed through the connector PSD2 pin 5 to the Horizontal Driver Transistor Q751. This transistor switches the ground return for pin (8) of the Driver transformer (T751). 28 volts is supplied to pin (5) and this switching al-lows EMF to develop. As this signal collapses, it creates a pulse on the output pin of (T751) at pin (4) to the base of the Deflection Horizontal output transistor Q777. Two transistors monitor the SW +9V line, Q707 and Q708. When the set is turned off, the H. Drive signal from IC01 could stop too soon. If this were to happen, the Horizontal output transistor Q777 would be damaged. To prevent this, if the SW +9V line drops, Q707 senses this because it’s base voltage drops. The base of Q708 rises and turns on, grounding the output from the H. Drive Transistor Q709. Q709 transistor switches the primary windings of the Deflection Transformer T752. T702 TRANSFORMER PRODUCES THE FOLLOWING OUTPUT PULSES; • Deflection Pulse from pin (7): This pulse is used by;
1. To X-Ray Protect through D707: This signal is monitored by the X-Ray Protect circuit to place the power supply into shut down if the Deflection circuit doesn’t operate.
2. The Dynamic Focus OUT Circuit PWB through PDK4 connector pin 5: A Dynamic Focus wave-form, (Horz. Parabola) is created. This is a parabolic waveform that is superimposed upon the static fo-cus voltage to compensate for beam shape abnormalities which occur on the outside edges of the screen because the beam has to travel further to those locations.
3. 1100V Generation circuit through D711, D712 and the connector PDF1 pin 1. This is the Dynamic Focus output voltage.
• +28V, M26V and RETRACE PULSE +28P and M28P: The positive 28V and the negative 28V is routed to the Deflection transformer T752. They enter the transformer as a pure DC voltage then a 7.5V P/P hori-zontal pulse is added to the DC voltage and leaves as +28P and M28P. From here these voltages are routed to the Convergence output section and they are rectified. They become +33V and -33V respectively. This proc-ess prevents the need for another power supply. (Note: the M stands for Minus voltage.)
HORIZONTAL BLANKING (H. BLK) GENERATED FROM PIN (7): The Horizontal Pulse is also routed to the Horizontal Blanking generation transistor Q706. This transistor gener-ates the 13V P/P called H Blk. This signal goes to the following circuits; • To pin the PSD2 connector pin 7 to pin (24) of IC01 as FBP In. Here this signal is used as a comparison sig-
nal. It is compared to the reference signal coming in at pin (15) Horizontal Sync. If there are any differences between these two signals, the output Drive signal from pin (26) is corrected.
NOTE: When a 1080i signal is input through component inputs, the Rainforest IC detects this as well and outputs the Vertical Squeeze (V. Squ) signal from pin (36). The Reference signal for Horizontal Sync now becomes the Y input from component, pin (8).
• To the Convergence circuit for correction waveform generation. • Sweep Loss Circuit (QN01) to shut off the CRTs if Horizontal deflection is lost. • Through the connector PSD2 pin (7): The H Blk signal is routed from here to the Signal PWB to be used by
different circuits. The Microprocessor uses this signal for OSD positioning and for Station Detection during Auto programming within the coincidence detector. The PinP unit uses this signal for switching purposes. Like the read/write clock, positioning, etc…
• The Horizontal Blanking signal H Blk from Q706 is also sent to the High Voltage Driver IC IH01 pin (3). This IC uses this signal as its reference signal to produce the High Voltage Drive waveform output from pin (1). This output is routed to the driver transistors, QH02. Then to the High Voltage Horizontal Output Tran-
(Continued on page 2)
DP-1X DEFLECTION BLOCK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 03-02
(Continued from page 1) sistor QH01. This transistor switches the primary of the Flyback transformer TH01. Deflection B+ 115V2 is sent through pin (9) and output pin (10) to the collector of the Horizontal Output Transistor QH01.
A sample of the High Voltage is output from the Flyback transformer TH01 pin (12). This voltage is sent to pin (9) of the High Voltage Driver IC IH01. This voltage is compared to the reference voltage available at pin (12). If there is a difference between the two voltages, an error voltage is generated and output from pin (10) and input again at pin (11) where it manipulates the PWM (Pulse With Modulation) signal producing the Horizontal Drive signal output from pin (1). The error signal from pin (10) is also sent to the Side Pen Cushion circuit through (R752). This signal manipu-lates the amount of pin cushion correction dependant upon the amount of High Voltage error voltage detected by the Side Pen Cushion op-amp (I701) at pin (3). It’s important to notice that the High Voltage circuit can not function without the Horizontal Deflection circuit providing a drive signal. GENERAL INFORMATION: The DP-1X deflection circuit differs from conventional projection product. It utilizes in a sense, two horizontal output circuits. One for Deflection and one for High Voltage. There are many terms around the Horizontal circuit that are not shown on the Diagram. Some of these terms are explained first: CUT OFF: Cut of collapses the Vertical circuit during I2C Bus alignments, during CRT Set Up. ABL: ABL voltage is generated by monitoring the current through the Flyback transformer. This voltage will fluctuate down when the scene is bright and up when the scene is dark. The ABL voltage will manipulate the screen bright-ness and contrast to prevent blooming under these conditions. H BLK: • H Blk: Horizontal and Vertical Blanking is developed within the Deflection circuit. The Horizontal Blanking
pulse operates around 13V P/P and is produced by taking a sample pulse from the Deflection transformer T752.
V BLK: • V Blk: The Vertical Blanking pulse is generated from the Vertical output IC, I601 pin (11). This pulse nor-
mally operates at 21V P/P. IR: The Infrared Pulses coming from the remote control are routed through the Deflection PWB to the Digital Con-vergence Unit. During DCAM (Digital Convergence Adjustment Mode), the Remote Control provides instruction codes for the DCU. DIG RGB/ BUSY: This indicates Digital RGB and BUSY. • Digital RGB represents the On Screen Display produced by the DCU for generating the Digital Convergence
adjustment grid and text produced during certain conditions such as Magic Focus, Sensor Initialization, Data Storage, etc…
• Busy notifies the DAC1 (I006 pin 1) which in turn notifies the Microprocessor I001 that the DCU has en-tered the DCAM. During this time, the Microprocessor ignores the remote control commands.
(Continued on page 3)
DP-1X DEFLECTION BLOCK CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 03-03
(Continued from page 2) MAGIC SW: (MAGIC FOCUS) When the customer activates MAGIC FOCUS from the Front Control panel or via the Menu, Magic Focus is Energized by producing a low at pin 14 of the DCU. D SIZE: Digital Size is a control signal for raster enlargement when MAGIC FOCUS is operated. Raster enlargement is required for the MAGIC FOCUS PATTERN to hit the photo sensors. This signal is output from DCU and routed to the base of Q710 for enlarging horizontal size through the Pin Cushion circuit and through Q603 to the Vertical Output IC I601 pin (4) to enlarge the vertical size. In some cases, this control signal is called "A.SIZE". It's the same function between DIG.SIZE and A.SIZE. TO CONVERGENCE YOKES: The DCU provides compensation signal for deflection abnormalities to the convergence output IC. The Conver-gence output IC in turn, amplify the signals and rout them to the convergence yokes. +B 115V1: The Deflection transformer receives the 115V V1 DC source. +B 115V2: The High Voltage Transformer TH01 (Flyback) receives the 115V V2 DC source. HV PARABOLA: See DF Out. SCREEN 700V: 700V Supplied to the screen grids on the CRT’s. FOCUS 12KV: Focus voltage supplied to the CRT’s. 30Kv HV: 30,000 volts DC supplied to the CRT’s anodes. TO DEFLECTION YOKES: Horizontal and Vertical deflection wave forms driving the deflection yokes. V SQUEEZE: (This signal is not used in the 16 X 9 screen aspect models). V. SQU is a signal that goes high when a 1080i signal is input through component in and Display 5 (1080i Mode) is selected through the customer’s menu. This signal is generated by the Rainforest IC. When this signal goes high, it switches the DCU into a different set of memories for Convergence data and Magic Focus data. It also shrinks the Vertical Size to match the 16 X 9 image to squeeze all the visible horizontal lines into a 16 X 9 image. NOTE: 16 X 9 Aspect models have the ability to select 1080i mode as well. However, they do not produce the V. Squeeze signal because there’s no need for it. 1080i Through Mode means that the signal bypasses the Flex Con-verter and is processed directly by the Rainforest IC. SERVICE ONLY SWITCH: Drops pin 9 of the PDG connector low and the DCU enters the Digital Convergence Adjustment Mode, (DCAM), producing the DCAM grid.
Not
in 1
6X9
Not
in 1
6X9
Aspe
ct S
ets
DP1
X D
EFLE
CTI
ON
BLO
CK
DIA
GR
AM
HV
Con
trol
(M62
50B
)H
V D
RIV
EQ
H02
HV
OU
T(Q
H01
)
FBT
THO
1H
IGH
VO
LTA
GE
REG
ULA
TIO
ND
ETEC
TOR
DY
NA
MIC
FOC
US
OU
T2S
C46
86X
3
FOC
US
PAC
K
H-S
IZE
SID
E-PI
NC
ON
TRO
L
DC
cou
ple
/ 3
HO
RZ.
DR
IVE
HO
RZ.
OU
T
SEN
SOR
DIS
TRIB
UTI
ON
PHO
TOSE
NSO
R
SER
VIC
ESW
ITC
H
CO
NV
. OU
TST
K39
2-11
0
+
Focu
s(9
KV
)
Scre
en(7
00V
)
+AB
L
6 /8 /
/ 8 (D
P17)
DIG
ITA
LC
ON
V.
UN
ITH
C21
52/3
+B (1
15V
)
34v,
-34v
6 /
HV
Para
bola
1100
V
Vcp
+26V
,-2
6V
D S
ize
Mag
ic S
W
D S
ize
H Blk
Dig RGBBusy
IR
H B
lk
V P
arab
ola
Saw
Size
Reg
ulat
ion
Con
trol
VER
TIC
AL
OU
TPU
T
To D
efle
ctio
n Y
okes
To D
efle
ctio
n Y
okes
32K
v H
V
Focu
s12
Kv
3 / / 3
DF
Out
Ret
race
Pul
se
HO
TT7
52
Cut
Off
AB
L
IRD
ig R
GB
Bus
y
To C
onve
rgen
ceY
okes
H D
rive
Def
lect
ion
Tran
sfor
mer
Hig
h Vo
ltage
Tran
sfor
mer
From Sig PWB
2SC
5690
Q77
7
H B
lk
TDA
817A
+26P
,-2
6P
H B
lk
2SC
3116
Q75
1
I601
IH01
See
Not
e:
Not
in43
FDX
10B
11V
V D
rive
V S
quee
zeV
Blk
11V
+28V
D S
ize
H B
lk
V S
quee
ze
V B
lk
+5V
-5V
GT8
Q10
1
PAGE 03-04
Not
e: M
agic
SW
Sw
itch
calle
d C
onve
rgen
ce A
djus
t in
43FD
X10B
B+
Mod
ulat
or
V S
quee
ze
115V
B+
I701
/ 4 (D
P1X
)D
efle
ctio
n ru
ns a
t 33.
75 K
hzat
all
times
for a
ll in
puts
.
DP-1X HORIZONTAL DRIVE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 03-05
HORIZONTAL DRIVE CIRCUIT DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION: (See Circuit Diagram) CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION When B+ arrives at the Rainforest IC IC01 pin (19), horizontal drive is output from pin (26). The drive signal is routed through the connector PSD2 pin 5 to the Horizontal Driver Transistor Q709. This transistor switches the ground return for pin (8) of the Driver transformer (T702). 28 volts is supplied to pin (5) and this switching al-lows EMF to develop. As this signal collapses, it creates a pulse on the output pin of (T702) at pin (4) to the base of the Deflection Horizontal output transistor Q777. Two transistors monitor the SW +9V line, Q707 and Q708. When the set is turned off, the H. Drive signal from IC01 could stop too soon. If this were to happen, the Horizontal output transistor Q777 would be damaged. To prevent this, if the SW +9V line drops, Q707 senses this because it’s base voltage drops. The base of Q708 rises and turns on, grounding the output from the H. Drive Transistor Q709. (Note: New Information: Q707 and Q708 SHOULD BE REMOVED from the Circuit if Q777 is ever found shorted or defective.) Q777 transistor switches the primary windings of the Deflection Transformer T701. T701 transformer produces the following output pulses;
Deflection Pulse from pin (7): This pulse is used by; 1) To X-Ray Protect through D707: This signal is generated by monitoring the Deflection Transformer. If a
rectified DC voltage that is created by the Deflection transformer is not detected, the power supply is placed into shut down.
2) The Dynamic Focus OUT Circuit PWB through PDK4 connector pin 5: A Dynamic Focus waveform, (Horz. Parabola) is created. This is a parabolic waveform that is superimposed upon the static focus volt-age to compensate for beam shape abnormalities which occur on the outside edges of the screen because the beam has to travel further to those locations.
3) 1100V Generation circuit through D711, D712 and the connector PDF1 pin 1. • This is the Dynamic Focus output voltage.
+28V, M26V and RETRACE PULSE +28P and M28P: The positive 28V and the negative 28V is routed to the Deflection transformer T701. They enter the transformer as a pure DC voltage then a 7.5V P/P horizontal pulse is added to the DC voltage and leaves as +28P and M28P. From here these voltages are routed to the Convergence output section and they are rectified. They become +33V and -33V respectively. This process prevents the need for another power supply. (Note: the M stands for Minus voltage.)
HORIZONTAL BLANKING (H. Blk) GENERATED from pin (7) of T701: The Horizontal Pulse is also routed to the Horizontal Blanking generation transistor Q706. This transistor gener-ates the 13V P/P called H Blk. This signal goes to the following circuits;
• To pin the PSD2 connector pin 7 to pin (24) of IC01 as FBP In. Here this signal is used as a comparison signal. It is compared to the reference signal coming in at pin (15) Horizontal Sync. If there are any dif-ferences between these two signals, the output Drive signal from pin (26) is corrected. • NOTE: When a 1080i signal is input through component inputs, the Rainforest IC detects this as
well and outputs the Vertical Squeeze (V. Squ) signal from pin (36). (NOT in the 16 X 9 Aspect Models). The Reference signal for Horizontal Sync now becomes the Y input from component, pin (8).
• To the Convergence circuit for correction waveform generation. • Sweep Loss Circuit (QN01) to shut off the CRTs if Horizontal deflection is lost. • Through the connector PSD2 pin (7): The H Blk signal is routed from here to the Signal PWB to be used
by different circuits. • The Microprocessor uses this signal for OSD positioning and for Station Detection during Auto program-
ming within the coincidence detector. • The PinP unit uses this signal for switching purposes. Like the read/write clock, positioning, etc…
(Continued on page 6)
DP-1X HORIZONTAL DRIVE CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 03-06
(Continued from page 5) • The Horizontal Blanking signal H Blk from Q706 is also sent to the High Voltage Driver IC IH01 pin (3).
This IC uses this signal as its reference signal to produce the High Voltage Drive waveform output from pin (1). This output is routed to the driver transistors, QH02. Then to the High Voltage Horizontal Output Transistor QH01. This transistor switches the primary of the Flyback transformer TH01. Deflection B+ 115V2 is sent through pin (9) and output pin (10) to the collector of the Horizontal Output Transistor QH01.
A sample of the High Voltage is output from the Flyback transformer TH01 pin (12). This voltage is sent to pin (9) of the High Voltage Driver IC IH01. This voltage is compared to the reference voltage available at pin (12). If there is a difference between the two voltages, an error voltage is generated and output from pin (10) and input again at pin (11) where it manipulates the PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) signal producing the Horizontal Drive signal output from pin (1). The error signal from pin (10) is also sent to the Side Pen Cushion circuit through (R752). This signal manipulates the amount of pin cushion correction dependant upon the amount of High Voltage error voltage detected by the Side Pen Cushion op-amp (I701) at pin (3). It’s important to notice that the High Voltage circuit can not function without the Horizontal Deflection circuit providing a drive signal. GENERAL INFORMATION: The DP-1X deflection circuit differs from conventional Hitachi product. It utilizes in a sense, two horizontal out-put circuits. One for Deflection and one for High Voltage. This allows for better deflection stabilization and is not influenced by fluctuations of the High Voltage circuit which may cause unacceptable breathing and side pulling of the deflection.
HV
Sam
ple
IC
01
24
19
H O
ut26
FBP
In
HV
CC
21O
sc.
XC
01
16H
. Syn
c In
From
Fle
xC
onve
rter
61
7 8
B+
115V
V1
11 12
Def
.H
Pul
se
+28V
+28P
Q70
9
58
28V
Q77
7
T702
H. D
ef. Y
oke
G
H. D
ef. Y
oke
B
H. D
ef. Y
oke
R
T70
1
14
Q70
6H
.Blk
.
To C
onve
rgen
ce C
ircui
t
To S
wee
p Lo
ss D
et.
Circ
uit Q
N01
IH01
3G
en
1011
9
Driv
e
9 10
Hig
hV
olta
ge
TH
01
QH
02
QH
01
115V
V2
12
FB InRef
. V.
PAGE 03-07
To D
ynam
ic F
ocus
Thro
ugh
PDK
4 (5
)
To X
-Ray
Pro
tect
?Th
roug
h R
728,
D70
7
910
M28
V
M28
P
HV
CO
VC
C
HD
1 In
DP1
X S
ERIE
S C
HA
SSIS
HO
RIZ
ON
TAL
DR
IVE
CIR
CU
IT
7 5
11PS
D2
PSD
3
Sign
al P
WB
Q70
1
5
1100
V G
ener
atio
nD
711,
D71
2PD
F1 (1
)
H.B
lk.
H O
ut
Def
Pow
erD
ef P
WB
Com
1
E r r o r
121
To M
icro
. for
OSD
, Aut
o Pr
og, S
D, A
FC,
810
80i
Thro
ugh
Mod
e
See
Vol
tage
and
Wav
efor
mC
hart
on n
ext p
age.
SW+9
V
Q70
8
Q70
7Q
777
Prot
ectio
nC
ircui
t
Y2
In
Rain
fore
st IC
To P
in C
ushi
onC
orre
ctio
n C
ircui
t
I701
3
IH01
3Gen
10
11
9
Drive
PAGE 03-08
DP-1X SERIES CHASSIS HORIZONTAL DRIVE IC VOLTAGES & WAVE FORMS
Com1
Error
12
1
Pin 1 = 4.79V (6.2V with Blank Raster) Varies with Brightness levels.Pin 2 = 11.58VPin 3 = 0.68VPin 4 = 2.34VPin 5 = 1.52VPin 6 = 0.0VPin 7 = 1.65VPin 8 = 0.0VPin 9 = 7.11VPin 10 = 7.11VPin 11 = 7.11VPin 12 = 7.11VPin 13 = 2.34VPin 14 = 1.85VPin 15 = 4.89VPin 16 = 0.0V
Pin 1 1.4V P/P 33.75Khz
Pin 3 600mV P/P 33.75Khz
Pin 4 296mV P/P 33.75Khz
DP-1X Sweep Loss Circuit Diagram Explanation
Page 03-09
(See Circuit Diagram on Page 03-10) The key component in the Sweep Loss Detection circuit is QN02. This transistor is normally biased off. When the base becomes more negative, it will be turned on, causing the SW +11V to be applied to two different circuits, the Spot circuit and the High Voltage Drive circuit. SPOT CIRCUIT When QN02 is turned on, the SW +11V will be applied to the anode of DN11, forward biasing it. This voltage will then pass through DN11. It will then be clamped by DN12, and arrive at pin 3 of PSD2. It will then be directed to the Signal PWB where it will activate the Video Mute circuitry Q023 - Q021. This is done to prevent CRT burns. Another input to this circuit is pin 4 of PSD2 called “CUT OFF”. This will activate when accessing certain adjustments parameters in the service mode; i.e. turning off vertical drive for making CRT drive or cut-off adjustments. When Vertical Drive is defeated, the Vertical Sweep loss circuit would activate. Cut Off is routed to QN06 to “inhibit” the Spot line from activating and shutting off the CRTs. HIGH VOLTAGE DRIVE CIRCUIT When QN02 is turned on, the SW +11V will also be routed through RN15 and DN09 and applied to the High Voltage Drive IC IH01 at pin 14. When this occurs, the IC will stop generating the drive signal that is used to produce High Voltage via QH02, the High Voltage Driver. Again, this is done to prevent CRT burn, especially during sweep loss. CONCERNING QN02 There are several factors that can affect the operation of QN02; loss of vertical or horizontal blanking. Loss of Vertical Blanking (V Blk) The Vertical pulse at the base of QN05 switches ON05 on and off at the vertical rate. This discharges CN03 sufficiently enough to prevent the base of QN04 from going high to turn it on and activate QN02. When the 24 Vp/p positive vertical blanking pulse is missing from the base of QN05, it will be turned off, which will cause the collector to go high because CN03 charges up through RN11. This in turn will cause QN04 to turn on because it’s base pulls up high, creating an increase of current flow from emitter to collector and up through RN08, (which is located across the emitter base junction of QN02), to the SW +11V supply. This increase of current flow through RN08 will bias on QN02 and the events described in “Spot Circuit Activation” above will occur. Loss of Horizontal Blanking (H Blk) The Horizontal pulse at the base of QN01 switches ON01 on and off at the horizontal rate. This discharges CN02 sufficiently enough to prevent the base of QN03 from going high to turn it on and activate QN02. When the 11.6 Vp/p positive horizontal blanking pulse is missing from the base of QN01, it will be turned off, which will cause the collector to go high through DN03, RN02 and SW +11V as CN02 charges. This in turn will cause QN03 to turn on because it’s base is pulled up high when DN02 fires. When QN03 turns on, an increase of current flow from emitter to collector, through RN07, and up through RN08. This increase of current flow through RN08 will bias on QN02 and the events described in “Spot Circuit Activation” above will occur.
RN02
RN03
CN02
Prevents CRT Burn
DP1X SWEEP LOSS DETECTION CIRCUIT
DN06
RN11
DN07
CN03
CN04
RN13V. Blk.
24V P/P
H. Blk.
CN01
RN04RN05
DN01
RN01
DN03 RN10
RN08
RN06
DN1111.6V P/P
SW+11V
SPOT
RN09VerticalBlanking
FromPin 11 I601
HorizontalBlanking
FromQ706 Emitter
PAGE 03-10
QN01QN03
QN02
QN04
QN05
IH01
1 Drive
High VoltageDriver IC
3
From I006DAC1Pin 6
SpotInhibit
DN10
When Vertical Driveis turned Off duringadjustment, I 2C.
DN09
DN12
QN06
DN02
SW+11V
14
RN15
StopsDrive
RN16
RH08
Stops High VoltageDrive Signals Frombeing producedwhen Sweep Loss isdetected.
High VoltageH Drive
QH02
To DeflectionPower Supply
Circuit Diagram
RN07
SPOTPROTECT
DN04
DN05
PSD2
SW+11V
DN08
DN13
RN17
4CUTOFF
RN12
RN14
To Q023Signal1of 3
See A/VMUTECircuit
Slightlyaboveblack
to avoid16X9
burningan image
DP-1X CHASSIS DISPLAYING A (16x9) IMAGE ON (4X3) DISPLAY
TOP AND BOTTOM PANNELS ARE OSD GENERATED
PAGE 03-11
Bottom Pannel
Top Pannel
No Deflectionin the Black Area.
All 540 linescompressed intothe visable area.
Possibility of16X9 window
burn in!!!!
No Deflection
Visible Area
THROUGH MODE, VERTICAL IS COLLAPSED
No Deflection
CustomerMenu
VerticalCenter
Adjustable
VER
TIC
AL
SQU
EEZE
FO
R 1
080i
TH
RO
UG
H M
OD
EN
OT
FOR
TH
E 16
X 9
ASP
ECT
MO
DEL
S
PAGE 03-12
IC01
8
PSD
2
1
Verti
cal S
quee
ze(V
. SQ
U)
R74
4
Q70
4R
743
To S
ide
Pin
Cus
hion
Circ
uit
I701
, Q70
3, Q
701
Verti
cal
Para
bolic
R74
2C
702
RH
2947
KQ
H03
RH
30
ABL
To P
SD2
pin
2
115V
v2 R
H27
39K
RH
2833
K
I601 7
R63
4 R60
3
Q60
1
D60
2
C60
1
C61
2C
603
VER
TIC
AL R
AMP
Com
pone
nt Y
1080
i Onl
y16
x9 H
D
DAC
2
RAI
NFO
RES
TIC
Y2 In
SIG
NAL
PW
B
DEF
LEC
TIO
N P
WB
SW+9
V RC
84
RG
58
36
From
Flyb
ack
Pin
3
IC01
55
VP
Out
27
Y/C
Vcc
21O
sc.
15V
. Syn
c In
From
Fle
xC
onve
rter
V. D
ef. Y
oke
B
I601
3
PAGE 03-13
HV
CO
VC
C
VD
1 In
DP-
1X (4
X 3
Asp
ect M
odel
s) S
ERIE
S C
HA
SSIS
VER
TIC
AL
OU
TPU
T C
IRC
UIT
11 9
7
PSD
2PS
D3
Sign
al P
WB
V.B
lk.
Def
Pow
erD
ef P
WB
1
To M
icro
. for
OSD
Pos
ition
ing
V D
rive
Trig
ger
Inpu
t
V O
UT
R62
2C
609
D60
5
8
D60
4
R62
62
PMB 1
R62
72
PMG 1
R62
82
PMR 1
R62
5
D60
7
D60
6O
utpu
tSt
age
Vs
9
R60
4
R60
5
2
Inve
rting
Inpu
t
Buf
fer
Out
R61
6
C60
7
R62
01.
2 oh
mR62
1
C60
8
To S
ide
Pin
Cus
hion
Circ
uit
To D
ynam
icFo
cus C
ircui
t
6G
ndV
s
28V
D60
3
C60
4
7
C60
3R
amp
Gen
5C
602
NC
R60
2
D60
1
R60
6
R60
7V
.Siz
e4
R60
8R
618
Hig
htA
dj
R61
5
C60
6
V. D
ef. Y
oke
G
V. D
ef. Y
okeR
11Fl
ybac
kPu
lse
C60
5+ -
R613
R61
4
V O
UT
L601
R61
91.
2 oh
m
V.B
lk.To
Ver
tical
Sw
eep
Loss
Det
ectio
n C
ircui
tTo
Con
v. C
ircui
t
X Ra
yPr
otec
t
D60
8Q
604
R62
90.
68
R63
1
R63
0
C61
0
10
R61
1R
610
R60
9
V S
quee
ze
C60
1
C61
2
D60
2
R60
3
R63
4Q
602
Q60
1
Q60
3
R63
5
R61
2D
Siz
e
IC01
55
VP
Out
27
Y/C
Vcc
21O
sc.
15V
. Syn
c In
From
Fle
xC
onve
rter
V. D
ef. Y
oke
B
I601
3
PAGE 03-14
HV
CO
VC
C
VD
1 In
DP-
14G
(16
X 9
Asp
ect M
odel
s) S
ERIE
S C
HA
SSIS
VER
TIC
AL
OU
TPU
T C
IRC
UIT
11 9
7
PSD
2PS
D3
Sign
al P
WB
V.B
lk.
Def
Pow
erD
ef P
WB
1
To M
icro
. for
OSD
Pos
ition
ing
V D
rive
Trig
ger
Inpu
t
V O
UT
R62
2C
609
D60
5
8
D60
4
R62
62
PMB 1
R62
72
PMG 1
R62
82
PMR 1
R62
5
D60
7
D60
6O
utpu
tSt
age
Vs
9
R60
4
R60
5
2
Inve
rting
Inpu
t
Buf
fer
Out
R61
6
C60
7
R62
01.
2 oh
mR62
1
C60
8
To S
ide
Pin
Cus
hion
Circ
uit
To D
ynam
icFo
cus C
ircui
t
6G
ndV
s
28V
D60
3
C60
4
7
C60
3
Ram
pG
en
5
C60
2
NC
R60
2
D60
1
R60
6
R60
7V
.Siz
e4
R60
8
R61
8H
ight
Adj
R61
5
C60
6
V. D
ef. Y
oke
G
V. D
ef. Y
okeR
11Fl
ybac
kPu
lse
C60
5+ -
R61
3
R61
4V
OU
T
L601
R61
91.
2 oh
mV
.Blk
.
To V
ertic
alSw
eep
Loss
Det
ectio
n C
ircui
t
To C
onv.
Circ
uit
X Ra
yPr
otec
t
D60
8Q
604
R62
90.
68
R63
1
R63
0
C61
0
10
D S
izeQ
503
R61
1R
610
R60
9
DP-
1X S
IDE
PIN
CU
SHIO
N C
IRC
UIT
DIA
GR
AM
D S
IZE
R70
1Q
703
PAGE 03-15
SW+1
1V
13
42
86
57
+-
+ -
I701
115V
V2
R70
2
R70
3
R71
4
HV
Sam
ple
IH01
3G
en
1011
9
Driv
e
9 10
Hig
hV
olta
ge
TH
01
QH
02Q
H01
115V
V2
12FB
InRef
. V.
Com
1
E r r o r
121H
Driv
e
Q70
1
Q71
0
R70
4
D71
3
R70
8
R74
7
R70
7
R70
6
D70
1
R71
5C
731
R75
2
C73
0
R75
1
C70
1
R71
7
C70
1
D70
2D
703
X-R
AY
Pro
tect
C72
2 R72
1SW
+11V
R71
0
R71
1
R71
3
R71
2
D71
4H
Siz
e
R70
9C
702
R71
0V
Squ
eeze
R73
4
R74
2
Q70
4
V P
arab
olic
To H
. Driv
eTr
ansf
orm
er T
701
Thro
ugh
Mod
e =
Hi
Mag
ic F
ocus
= H
i
C71
5L7
03R
729
To H
. Lin
earit
yof
f H. Y
oke
Ret
urns
L704
, L70
5
11.6
1V4.
39V
5.17
V5.
14V
7.3V
7.11
V
Alvie W Rodgers
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DP-1X CHASSIS
DIGITAL CONVERGENCE INFORMATION
SECTION 4
Alvie W Rodgers
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE INTERCONNECT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 04-01
Use this explanation in conjunction with the Digital Convergence Interconnect circuit diagram Page 04-05. The Digital Convergence circuit is responsible for maintaining proper convergence of all three colors being pro-duced by the CRTs. Many different abnormalities can be quickly corrected by running Magic Focus. The Digital convergence Interconnect Diagram depicts how the Digital Convergence Circuit is interfaced with the rest of the Projection’s circuits. The main components and/or circuits are; • THE DIGITAL CONVERGENCE UNIT (DCU) • INFRARED REMOTE RECEIVER • ON SCREEN DISPLAY PATH • CONVERGENCE OUTPUT STKs • CONVERGENCE YOKES • MAGIC FOCUS SENSORS AND INTERFACE • MICROPROCESSOR • RAINFOREST IC (Video Processor). • SERVICE ONLY SWITCH • MAGIC FOCUS activation control utilizing the Magic Focus Switch on Front Control Panel. THE DIGITAL CONVERGENCE UNIT (DCU) (Generic for 8 sensor array models). The DCU is the heart of the Digital convergence circuit. Held within are all the necessary components for gener-ating the necessary waveforms for correction, and associated memories for the adjustment data and Magic Focus Data.
The Block above shows the relationship of the DCU to the rest of the set. Note that the light being produced by the CRTs is what is used by the sensors for Magic Focus. This allows the DCU to make adjustments regardless of circuit changes, magnet influence or mechanical, by actually using the light on the screen to make judgments. EEPROM AND SRAM SHOWN IN FIGURE 1: (8 Sensor Array only) (4 Sensor for Centering only). Each color can be adjusted in any one of 117 different locations. The internal workings of the DCU can actually make 256 adjustment points per color. These adjustment points are actual digital data stored in memory. This data
(Continued on page 2)
DIGITALCONVERGENCECIRCUIT
INTERPOLATION
X6 X6 X6X6X1
CY CLAMP
CRT
RG
B
H
V
117 Points Per/Color
Light
Sensors (X8)
Sensor PWBA/DData Comparator Serial-Parallel
Converter
TimingController
Stored Light Sensor Data
Technician's Eye
Error Data
EEPROM2K Bit
MIRROR
AC Applied, Copy from EEPROM, then caculations will be made. Time, approx. 20 sec.
Calculation of other 139 points per/color
Back Up
To Video Circuits
Addressableby
Technician
Also available;35 Adjustment Points9 Adjustment Points
PointsPer/Color
Via O.S.D.
117 Points Per/Color D/A Conv.Static Centering
Stored during Initialize
between stored dataand light sensor data
One Chip CPU
Infra-Red Decoder
Digital CrossHatch Gen. Timing
Controler
Serial/ParallelConverter
Gate Array 4000 gates
S-RAM(256Kbit)
FAST
EEPROM(2Kbit)
SLOW
8 bit128 Kbit
D/A
1st S
/H
2nd
S/H
LPF
CLA
MP
256 Adjusted
Displays CrossHatch
SCREENAdjust through observation
RemoteControl
Figure 1
DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE INTERCONNECT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 04-02
(Continued from page 1) represents a specific correction signal for that specific location. When the Service Technician makes any adjust-ment, the new information must be stored in memory, EEPROM. The EEPROM only stores the 117 different ad-justment points data, the SRAM interpolates to come up the additional 139 adjustment points for a total of 256 per color. The EEPROM data is slow in relationship to the actual deflection raster change. The SRAM is a very fast memory. So, during the first application of AC power, the EEPROM data is read and the SRAM makes the inter-polation and as long as power remains, interpolation no longer has to be made. This can be seen during an adjustment. If the Interpolation key is pressed on the remote control, what is happen-ing is that the SRAM must make those additional calculations beyond the 117 made by the Servicer and this is all placed into memory. INFRARED REMOTE CONTROL INPUT SHOWN IN FIGURE 1: As can be seen in Figure 1, the Infrared Remote control signals actually manipulate the internal data when the Service Only Switch is pressed on the Deflection PWB. This process actually prevents the Microprocessor from responding to Remote commands, via a Busy line output from the DCU. (See Microprocessor Port Description page for further details.) INTERNAL CONTROLLER, D/A CONVERTERS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1: The internal controller, takes the stored data and converts it to a complicated Convergence correction waveform for each color. The Data is converted through the D/A converter, 1st and 2nd sample and hold, the Low Pass Fil-ter that smoothes out the parasitic harmonic pulses from the digital circuit and the output Clamp that fixes the DC offset level. The DC offset voltage is adjusted by several things. (16X9 aspect SWX models with 8 Sensors only.) • Raster Centering. The Raster Centering adjustment actually moves the DC offset voltage for Horizontal and
Vertical direction. This Offset voltage will move the entire raster Up or Down, Left or Right. • Static Centering. This is accessed by holding down the Magic Focus button on the front control panel for
more that 10 Seconds. The word Static will come up on the screen, generated by the DCU, and using the re-mote controls up/down/left or right cursor buttons, the Red or Blue raster can again be moved up/down/left or right. This allows adjustment of the entire raster for Red or Blue to match the Green Raster.
By holding down the Magic button for more that 5 seconds, but not more than 10, the word Center comes up on screen. Again generated from the DCU. This adjustment only moves the center 60% of the raster for Red or Blue. The assumption for this adjustment was related to the location of the Magic Focus sensors located on the outside perimeter of the inside cabinet. It was assumed possible that the outside could have been corrected, but the inside middle might not. This adjustment is rarely necessary if at all. MAGIC FOCUS MEMORY SHOWN IN FIGURE 1: NOTE: These sets have two Digital Convergence Memories. One for Normal display mode and one for 1080i Through Mode display. (4X3 Aspect Models only). Normal requires a complete Digital Convergence adjustment procedure along with Magic Focus Sensor Initiali-zation and 1080i Through Mode does too! (4X3 Aspect Models only). When a complete Digital Convergence procedure has been performed and the adjustment information stored in memory by pressing the PROG button twice (2), it is mandatory to run Sensor Initialization. This is done by pressing the PROG button on the remote once (1), then pressing the PIP CH button. This begins a prepro-grammed generation of different light patterns. Magic Focus memory memorizes the characteristics of the light pattern produced by the digital convergence module. If a convergence touchup is required in the future, the customer simply presses the Magic Focus button on the front panel and the set begins another preprogrammed production of different light patterns. This automated process duplicates the same light pattern it memorized from the initialization process, re-aligns the set to the memorized convergence condition.
(Continued on page 3)
DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE INTERCONNECT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 04-03
(Continued from page 2) “MAGIC FOCUS” SENSORS SHOWN ON FIGURE 1: This process is a joint effort between the digital convergence module and 4 Photo-sensors, physically located on the middle edges of the cabinet, just behind the screen. The physical placement of the sensors assures that they will not produce a shadow on the screen that can be seen by the customer. Magic is activated when the set is on and by pressing the Magic button inside the front control panel door. An on-screen graphic will be displayed to confirm that the automatic convergence mode (Magic Focus) has begun. The digital convergence module produces different patterns for each CRT, and the sensors pick up the transmitted light, generate a DC voltage. This voltage is sent to the DCU and converted to digital data and compared with the memorized sensor initialization data. Distinct patterns will be generated in each primary color. As the process continues, the digital module manipulates the convergence correction waveforms that it is producing to force the convergence back into the original memorized configuration. When all cycles have been completed, the set will return to the original signal and the convergence will be corrected. In most cases, activating the Magic Focus will allow the set to correct itself, without further adjustments. EXPLANATION OF THE DIGITAL CONVERGENCE INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM: INFRARED RECEIVER: During normal operations, the IR receiver directs it signal to the Main Microprocessor where it interprets the in-coming signal and performs a predefined set of operations. However, when the Service Only Switch is pressed, the Main Microprocessor must ignore remote control commands. Now the DCU receives theses commands and interprets them accordingly. The Microprocessor is notified when the DCU begins its operation by the BUSY line. As long as the BUSY line is active, the Main Microprocessor ignores the IR signal. ON SCREEN DISPLAY PATH: MICROPROCESSOR SOURCE FOR OSD: The On Screen Display signal path is shown with the normal OSD information such as Channel Numbers, Vol-ume Graphic Bar, Main Menu, etc… sent from the Main Microprocessor to the Rainforest IC IC01 pins 37, 38 and 39. These are positive going pulses, about 5 V p/p and about 3uS in length dependant upon there actual hori-zontal time for display. (See the On Screen Display Path Circuit Diagram Explanation for further details). DCU SOURCE FOR OSD: The DCU has to produce graphics as well. When the Service Only switch is pressed, the Main Microprocessor knows the DCU is Busy as described before. Now the On Screen Display path is from the DCU to the Rainforest IC IC01 pins 33, 34 and 35. The output for the DCU OSD characters is out the PDG connector pins (11 Dig Red, 12 Dig Green and 13 Dig Blue). These are routed through their buffers (QK06 Dig Red, QK07 Dig Green and QK08 Dig Blue) to the PDK1 connector pins (2 Dig Red, 4 Dig Green and 5 Dig Blue). Then through their buffers, (QC24 Dig Red, QC23 Dig Green and QC22 Dig Blue). Then it arrives at the Rainforest IC IC01 at pins (35 Dig Red, 34 Dig Green and 33 Dig Blue). When a character pulse arrives at any of these pins, the internal color amp is saturated and the output is generated to the CRTs. Any combination for these inputs generates either the primary color Red, Green or Blue or the complementary color Red and Green which creates Yellow, Red and Blue which creates Ma-genta or Green and Blue which creates Cyan. (See the On Screen Display Path Circuit Diagram Explanation for further details). OUTPUT STKs: These are output amplifiers that take the correction waveforms generated by the DCU and amplify them to be used by the Convergence Yoke assemblies for each color. RV is Red Vertical Convergence correction. Adjust the location either up or down for Red. RH is Red Horizontal Convergence correction. Adjust the location either left or right for Red. GV is Green Vertical Convergence correction. Adjust the location either up or down for Red. GH is Green Horizontal Convergence correction. Adjust the location either left or right for Red. BV is Blue Vertical Convergence correction. Adjust the location either up or down for Red. BH is Blue Horizontal Convergence correction. Adjust the location either left or right for Red.
(Continued on page 4)
DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE INTERCONNECT DESCRIPTION
PAGE 04-04
(Continued from page 3) CONVERGENCE YOKES: Each CRT has a Deflection Yoke and a Convergence Yoke assembly. The Deflection manipulates the beam in accordance to the waveforms produced within the Horizontal Deflection circuit or the Vertical Deflection circuit. The Convergence Yoke assembly manipulates the Beam in accordance with the correction waveforms produced by the DCU. MAGIC FOCUS SENSORS AND INTERFACE: (4 Sensor Array) Same for 8 Sensor Array. Each of the four photo cells, called solar batteries in the service manual, have their own amps which develop the DC potential produced by the cells. Each amp is routed through the PDS1 connector and arrives at the PDS con-nector on the DCU where the DCU converts this DC voltage to Digital signals. These digital signals are used only when the Magic Focus Button is pressed and Magic Focus runs. MICROPROCESSOR: The Microprocessor is only involved in the Digital Convergence circuit related to IR (Infrared Remote Control Signals). When the DCU is put into the Digital Convergence Adjustment Mode, DCAM, the Microprocessor ig-nores IR pulses. This is accomplished by the BUSY signal from the DCU. The BUSY signal is routed from the DUC out the PDG connector pin 10, to the PDK1 connector pin 1, then the PSD1 connector pin 1 to the DAC1 I006 pin 1. Through I2C data communications SCL1 and SDA1, the DAC1 IC tell the microprocessor that the DCU is busy. RAINFOREST IC (Video Processor). The Rainforest IC, IC01 is only involved with the Digital Convergence circuit related to OSD. SERVICE ONLY SWITCH: The Service Only Switch is located just in front of the DCU on the Convergence Output PWB. If the front speaker grills are removed and the front access panel is opened, the switch will be on the far left hand side. When this button is pressed with the TV ON, the DCU enters the Digital Convergence Adjustment Mode. If the button is pressed and held down with the TV OFF and the power button is pressed, the Digital Convergence RAM is cleared. This turns off any influence from the DCU related to beam deflection. Magnetic centering is per-formed in the mode as well as the ability to enter the 3X3, (9 adjustment points) mode. Note: For the 4X3 Aspect models only, this will clear RAM for the 1080i through mode as well. MAGIC FOCUS SWITCH: • Located on the Front Control panel is the Magic Focus switch. When Magic Focus is activated by the cus-
tomer pressing this switch, the DCU enters the “MAGIC FOCUS” adjustment mode described earlier. • However, this year there is a change as to how the Magic Focus Switch works. • When the Customer presses the Magic Focus Switch, the low is sent to I007 pin 9 (DAC3). This IC commu-
nicates with the Microprocessor. The Microprocessor then communicates with I006 (DAC2) and it outputs a low on pin 7 (Magic Sw). This in turn starts the Magic Focus function.
• Also this year, the Magic Focus can be started from the Customer’s Menu. When selected by the customer, the same communication is performed to I006 (DAC2) and a low is sent out pin 7 to the DCU to start Magic Focus.
MAGIC FOCUS MEMORY: NOTE: These sets have two Digital Convergence Memories. One for Normal display mode and one for 1080i Through Mode display. (4X3 Aspect Models only). Normal requires a complete Digital Convergence adjustment procedure along with Magic Focus Sensor Initiali-zation and 1080i Through Mode does too! (4X3 Aspect Models only).
PFS
MAG SWI007
DA
C3
Dig
ital
Con
verg
ence
Uni
t"D
CU
"
"Mou
nted
on
Def
lect
ion
PW
B"
DP
-1X
CH
ASS
IS "
DIG
ITA
L C
ON
VE
RG
EN
CE
" IN
TE
RC
ON
NE
CT
ION
CIR
CU
IT D
IAG
RA
M
+5V
PD
S1
PD
G
4 9 10 11 8 12 13 14 5 6 7321P
DC
1 2 5 4 7 8 9
BV
BH
GV
RV
RH
Mut
e
67
510
+33
V
+28
P
-33V
-28P
+-
141311
+-
1618
+-
679
4
105
+28
P+
33V
+-
141311
+-
151618
+-
IK04
GV
RV
RHIK
05BV BH
GH
15
PC
B2 1 3
PC
G
3 1 2
PC
R
2 1 4 3
9
4 4
CY
V+
CY
V-
CY
H+
CY
H-
CY
V+
CY
V-
CY
H-
CY
H+
CY
V+
CY
V-
CY
H+
CY
H-
+28
VIK
022
1
3
To Blue Convergence Yokes To Green Convergence Yokes To Red Convergence Yokes
Dig
R
BU
SY
IR-I
n
Dig
G
Dig
B
"DC
AM
" D
igit
alC
onve
rgen
ce M
ode
PDK
1
4 5 6 7321
IC01
PZ
C
1 3 5
41 42 43
OS
D B
OSD
G
OS
D R
Dig
OS
D R
Dig
OS
D G
Dig
OS
D B
To CRTs
R G B
Con
verg
ence
PW
B
Ft.
Con
trol
PWB
Sign
alPW
B
Def
lect
ion
PWB
Sign
al P
WB
HM
O12
IR R
ecei
ver
3
IR O
ut
SK
01U
KD
GH
C21
53
QC
19
QC
35
QC
40
QC
30
Nor
mal
"L
o"
PAGE 04-05
Stby
+5VIR
In
817
12
3
1
5 6
MA
G S
W
SM09
GH
6
+5V
SR
AM
+5V-5V
MA
G S
W
9 5
Mag
ic F
ocus
2
I006
DA
C2
14 15
7
QC
20 QC
21 QC
24 QC
23 QC
22
37 38 39 35 34 33
2H V
ideo
PW
B
Con
verg
ence
PW
B
QK
06 QK
07 QK
084
817
12
Rai
nfor
est
Dig
OS
D R
Dig
OS
D G
Dig
OS
D B
OS
D B
OSD
G
OS
D R
R G B
PSD
1
4 5 6 7321
Ser
vice
Onl
y
1
BUSY
QM
05
QM
01
3739 38
OS
D B
OSD
G
OS
D R
SDA
12
SCL
1
1IR
3
I001
Mai
nU
p
S7 S6 S1 S0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PD
S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Gnd S7 S6
GN
D S
5 S1 S0
15
Sens
orP
WB
LE
DS1
, S3
S5 &
S7
4 T
otal
Sens
ors
+5V
Dig
ital
From
IK01
GN
D S
4
GN
D S
3
GN
D S
2
GN
D S
5
GN
D S
4
GN
D S
3
GN
D S
2
11
GN
D
49B
USY
BU
SY
Not
in th
e 43
FD
X10
BD
P-1
5E C
hass
is
SM09
isC
onve
rgen
ceA
djus
t in
43F
DX
10B
DP
17 C
hass
is u
se8
Sens
or A
rray
9 9
D S
ize
from
DC
Upi
n 6
PD
G
D S
IZE
PD
K3
pin
2
H B
lk P
DK
3 p
in 7
V B
lk P
DK
3 p
in 5
V S
qu
ee
z P
DK
3 p
in 1
Not
in 1
6 X
9 M
odels
MUTE STATUSSVCS
VCR PLUS+ INFO GUIDE/TVSCHD
PIP CHPIP FREEZE
PIP-MODE SWAP
PROG TV/VCR SLOW
REC
HITACHICLU-5711TSI
SELECTVOL CH
MENU EXIT
PIXHELP
ANT
0 LAST CHSLEEP
7 8 9
1 2 3
4 5 6
DVD AV1 AV2 AV3
SATCBLVCRTV
SOURCE WIZARD
POWER
CURSOR LEFT
BLUE (13X9)
REMOVECOLOR
CALCULATE
INITIALIZEPIP MODE +
PIP CH
WRITE TOROM
PRESS(2X)
READ OLDROM DATAPRESS (2X)
CENTERING
GREEN (3 X 3)
CORRECTIONBUTTONS
CROSSHATCHVIDEO
RASTER PHASE
RED (7 X 5)
REMOTE CONTROL CLU-5711 TSI (P/N HL01641)
PAGE 04-06
C.C. ASPECT
CURSOR UPCURSOR RIGHT
CURSOR DOWN
PIP ACCESS
VID1
VID2VID3
VID4
VID5
USED IN MODELS:61SWX10B, 61SWX12B53SWX10B, 53SWX12B43UWX10B, 53UWX10B61UDX10B, 53UDX10B43FDX11B, 43FDX10B
MUTE STATUSSVCS
VCR PLUS+ INFO GUIDE/TVSCHD
PIP CHPIP FREEZE
PIP-MODE SWAP
PROG TV/VCR SLOW
REC
HITACHICLU-5712TSI
SELECTVOL CH
MENU EXIT
PIXHELP
INPUT
0 LAST CHSLEEP
7 8 9
1 2 3
4 5 6
DVD AV1 AV2 AV3
SATCBLVCRTV
SOURCE WIZARD
POWER
CURSOR LEFT
BLUE (13X9)
REMOVECOLOR
CALCULATE
INITIALIZEPIP MODE +
PIP CH
WRITE TOROM
PRESS(2X)
READ OLDROM DATAPRESS (2X)
CENTERING
GREEN (3 X 3)
CORRECTIONBUTTONS
CROSSHATCHVIDEO
RASTER PHASE
RED (7 X 5)
REMOTE CONTROL CLU-5712 TSI (P/N HL01642)
PAGE 04-07
CURSOR UP
CURSOR RIGHT
CURSOR DOWN
PIP ACCESS
USED IN MODELS:53SBX10B
REMOTE CONTROL CLU-4311UG (P/N HL01651)Used with
60DX10B, 50DX10B43GX10B, 50GX30B
HP-1X ChassisPOWER
TV CBL/SAT DVD/VCR
PIP FREEZE
MOVESWAP
PIP CHHELP MENU
SELECT
MUTE LAST CHEXIT
VOL CH
0
7 8 9
1 2 3
4 5 6
HITACHICLU-4311UG
INPUT STATUS
PAGE 04-08
REC TV/VCR PIX
CURSOR LEFT
BLUE (13X9)
REMOVECOLOR
INITIALIZEPIP MODE +
PIP CH
WRITE TOROM
PRESS (2X)READ OLDROM DATAPRESS (2X) CENTERING
GREEN (3 X 3)
CORRECTIONBUTTONS
CROSSHATCHVIDEO
RASTER PHASE
RED (7 X 5)
CURSOR UP
CURSOR RIGHT
CURSOR DOWN
BR
H. SIZE
V. SIZE
Centering Offset
874
34
42
84
84
84
84
84
84
4234
11 71
656
1177 71 71 71 71 71 71 71 71
PAGE 04-09
RED OFFSET = 20mmBLUE OFFSET = 25mm (43UDX)BLUE OFFSET = 35mm (43FDX)
VERTICAL SIZE = 560mmHORIZONTAL SIZE = 825mm
PART NUMBER H312251
874
32
20 70
656
70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 20
82
65
65
65
65
65
82
70 70
20
65
2032
492
V SQUEEZE 16 X 9 HD MODE
DIGITAL CONVERGENCE OVERLAY DIMENSIONSNOTE: Aspect may not be correct but dimensions are correct.
43FDX10B & 43UDX10B OVERLAY DIMENSIONS (4 X 3) NORMAL MODE
43FDX10B & 43UDX10B OVERLAY DIMENSIONS (4 X 3) V. SQUEEZE MODE
PART NUMBER H312252
BR
H. SIZE
V. SIZE
Centering Offset
1078
44
52
103
103
103
103
103
103
5244
13 88
808
1388 88 88 88 88 88 88 88 88
PAGE 04-10
RED OFFSET = 15mmBLUE OFFSET = 25mm
VERTICAL SIZE = 690mmHORIZONTAL SIZE = 1020mm
PART NUMBER H312253
1078
32.3
20 69.5
808
69.5 69.5 69.5 69.5 69.5 69.5 69.5 69.5 69.5 20
82
64.6
64.6
64.6
64.6
64.6
82
69.5 69.5
19.9
64.6
19.932.3
606
V SQUEEZE 16 X 9 HD MODE
DIGITAL CONVERGENCE OVERLAY DIMENSIONSNOTE: Aspect may not be correct but dimensions are correct.
53UDX10B OVERLAY DIMENSIONS (4 X 3) NORMAL MODE
53UDX10B OVERLAY DIMENSIONS (4 X 3) V. SQUEEZE
PART NUMBER H312254
BR
H. SIZE
V. SIZE
Centering Offset
1240
48.5
59.5
119
119
119
119
119
119
59.548.5
15.2 100.8
930
15.2100.8 100.8 100.8 100.8 100.8 100.8 100.8 100.8 100.8
PAGE 04-11
RED OFFSET = 15mmBLUE OFFSET = 15mm
VERTICAL SIZE = 795mmHORIZONTAL SIZE = 1175mm
PART NUMBER H312255
1240
45.8
27.8 98.7
930
98.7 98.7 98.7 98.7 98.7 98.7 98.7 98.7 98.7 27.8
116
91.6
91.6
91.6
91.6
91.6
116
98.7 98.7
28.4
91.6
28.445.8
698
V SQUEEZE 16 X 9 HD MODE
DIGITAL CONVERGENCE OVERLAY DIMENSIONSNOTE: Aspect may not be correct but dimensions are correct.
61UDX10B OVERLAY DIMENSIONS (4 X 3) NORMAL MODE
61UDX10B OVERLAY DIMENSIONS (4 X 3) V SQUEEZE MODE
PART NUMBER H312256
PAGE 04-12
BR
H. SIZE
V. SIZE
Centering Offset
952
25.7
34.5
69.1
69.1
69.1
69.1
69.1
69.1
34.525.7
20 76
535
2076 76 76 76 76 76 76 76 76
RED OFFSET = 25mmBLUE OFFSET = 30mm
VERTICAL SIZE = 470mmHORIZONTAL SIZE = 880mm
PART NUMBER H312259
BR
H. SIZE
V. SIZE
Centering Offset
1173.2
31.8
42.6
85.2
85.2
85.2
85.2
85.2
85.2
42.631.8
25 93.6
660
2593.6 93.6 93.6 93.6 93.6 93.6 93.6 93.6 93.6
RED OFFSET = 20mmBLUE OFFSET = 25mm
VERTICAL SIZE = 580mmHORIZONTAL SIZE = 1060mm (53UDX)HORIZONTAL SIZE = 1105mm (53SWX)
PART NUMBER H312257
DIGITAL CONVERGENCE OVERLAY DIMENSIONSNOTE: Aspect may not be correct but dimensions are correct.43UWX10B" OVERLAY DIMENSIONS (16 X 9 Aspect)
53UWX10B & 53SWX10B/12B OVERLAY DIMENSIONS (16 X 9 Aspect)
BR
H. SIZE
V. SIZE
Centering Offset
1350
36.6
49.2
98.4
98.4
98.4
98.4
98.4
98.4
49.236.6
28.8107.7
762
28.8107.7 107.7 107.7 107.7 107.7 107.7 107.7 107.7 107.7
RED OFFSET = 15mmBLUE OFFSET = 25mm
VERTICAL SIZE = 665mmHORIZONTAL SIZE = 1250mm
PART NUMBER H312258
PAGE 04-13
DIGITAL CONVERGENCE OVERLAY DIMENSIONSNOTE: Aspect may not be correct but dimensions are correct.
61UWX10B & 61SWX10B/12B OVERLAY DIMENSIONS (16 X 9 Aspect)
DP-1X OVERLAY PART NUMBERS
PAGE 04-14
Below is the jig screen part number for the 2H models. 2001 Models HITACHI MODELS: H312251 43” 4x3 Full Mode H312252 43” 4x3 V Squeeze Mode H312253 53” 4x3 Full Mode H312254 53” 4x3 V Squeeze Mode H312255 61” 4x3 Full Mode H312256 61” 4x3 V Squeeze Mode H312259 43” 16x9 H312257 53” 16x9 H312258 61” 16x9 PHILIPS MODELS: H312261 60” Phillips 4x3 Full Mode H312262 60” Phillips 4x3 V Squeeze Mode H312263 55” Phillips 4x3 Full Mode H312264 55” Philips 4x3 V Squeeze Mode ZENITH MODELS: H312265 56” Zenith 16x9 H312266 65” Zenith 16x9
DP-1X CHASSIS
VIDEO INFORMATION
SECTION 5
Alvie W Rodgers
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
V1 S1
15 17 19
V2 S2
8 10 12
MO
NO
UT
41 39 37
V3 S3
22 24 26
Fron
t Con
trol P
WB
IX02
2Lin
e Y/
CSe
para
tor
V560
V41
U50
1M
ain
Tune
r
U50
2Su
b Tu
ner
63 30
PST1 13 18
SIG
NAL
PW
B
Aux
1 S-
YAu
x 1
S-C
Aux
1 Vi
deo
Aux
2 S-
YAu
x 2
S-C
Aux
2 Vi
deo
Aux
3 S-
YAu
x 3
S-C
Aux
3 Vi
deo
Aux
4 Vi
deo
Aux
5 Vi
deo
Mon
itor O
ut S
-YM
onito
r Out
S-C
Mon
itor O
ut V
ideo
V O
ut 1
Y In
1
C In
1
V In
Y O
ut
C O
ut
V O
ut 3
C O
ut 3
Y O
ut 3C
Out
2
V/Y
Out
2
C O
ut 1
Y O
ut 1
SUB
OU
T
DP-
1X C
hass
is V
ideo
Sig
nal P
ath
- NT
SC
TER
MIN
AL P
WB
IX03
SUB
Vide
o/C
hrom
aPr
oces
sor
Y In
C In
640Su
b C
r Out
Sub
Cb
Out
Sub
Y O
ut
PST213 18
QX0
7
QX0
8Q
X12
QX0
9Q
X11
Q50
5
Q50
6
I501
MA
INVi
deo/
Chr
oma
Proc
esso
rY
In
C In
640M
ain
Cr O
ut
2122 20
Mai
n C
b O
ut
Mai
n Y
Out
I502
56
Q56
4Q
554
-6db
Q55
8Q
557
Chr
oma
Tilt
Cor
rect
ion
I301
3D Y
/CSe
para
tor
V In
Q30
7
C O
ut838488
Q30
4Q
306
VID
EO L
PF
Y O
ut
Y LP
FY
AMP
Q31
3X3
03Q
314
Q31
5Q
316
C L
PFC
AM
PQ
309
X302
Q31
0Q
311
Q31
2
QX0
5
QX0
6M
AIN
OU
T
MO
NO
UT
IX01
A/V
Sele
ct
11 9 7
Q55
3Q
552
Q55
1
To IX04
/IX
05
SIG
NAL
PW
B
TER
MIN
AL P
WB
5856514953 474410 3 5PF
T
314
2122 20
119 8 14
For P
inP
Onl
y
PAGE 05-01
DP-
1X C
hass
is V
ideo
Sig
nal P
ath
- NTS
C,C
ompo
nent
, OSD
V4 V5
321434241C
OM
P 1
(Cr/P
r)C
OM
P 1
(Cb/
Pb)
CO
MP
1 (Y
)
CO
MP
2 (C
r/Pr)
CO
MP
2 (C
b/Pb
)C
OM
P 2
(Y)
IX04
Y/Pb
/Pr
Sele
ctor
(MA
IN)
(Cr/P
r) M
AIN
OU
T
(Cb/
Pb) M
AIN
OU
T
(Y) M
AIN
OU
T272625
353433987
SUB
Cr (
NTS
C)
SUB
Cb
(NTS
C)
SUB
Y (N
TSC
)
MA
IN C
r (N
TSC
)M
AIN
Cb
(NTS
C)
MA
IN Y
(NTS
C)
SIG
NA
L PW
B
CO
MP
1 (C
r/Pr)
CO
MP
1 (C
b/Pb
)C
OM
P 1
(Y)
CO
MP
2 (C
r/Pr)
CO
MP
2 (C
b/Pb
)C
OM
P 2
(Y)
IX05
Y/Pb
/Pr
Sele
ctor
(SU
B)
(Cr/P
r) S
UB
OU
T
(Cb/
Pb) S
UB
OU
T
(Y) S
UB
OU
T
SUB
Cr (
NTS
C)
SUB
Cb
(NTS
C)
SUB
Y (N
TSC
)
MA
IN C
r (N
TSC
)M
AIN
Cb
(NTS
C)
MA
IN Y
(NTS
C)
321434241353433987
6 48
QX2
1
QX2
2
QX2
3
18 1620
IX03
SUB
Vide
o/C
hrom
aPr
oces
sor
Sub
Cr O
ut
Sub
Cb
Out
Sub
Y O
utQ
X13
QX1
4
QX1
5
I501
MA
INVi
deo/
Chr
oma
Proc
esso
rM
ain
Cr O
ut
Mai
n C
b O
ut
Mai
n Y
Out
Q55
3
Q55
2
Q55
1
272625
QX1
8
QX1
9
QX2
0
UC
01FC
3U
NIT
345 171819
QC
01
QC
02
QC
03
18 1620
TER
MIN
AL
PWB
QC
09
QC
08
QC
06
QC
05
QC
04
3435 33 910 8
45
3
IC01
RG
BPr
oces
sor
Pr 1
InY
1 In
Pb 1
In
Pr 2
In
Y 2
In
Pb 2
In
QC
07
QC
19
QC
20
QC
21
I001
Mic
ro-
proc
esso
r
OSD
R
OSD
BO
SD G
OSD
R In
OSD
B In
OSD
G In
Ana
log
R In
Ana
log
B In
Ana
log
G In
4243 41
R O
ut
B O
ut
G O
ut
QK
08
QK
07
QK
06
QC
22
QC
23
QC
24D
EFLE
CTI
ON
PW
B
Dig
ital C
onv.
Uni
t
Dig
R O
ut
Dig
B O
ut
Dig
G O
ut
CO
NVE
RG
ENC
E PW
B
To CPT
PWB
s
SIG
NA
L PW
B
SIG
NAL
PW
B
PDG
12 1311
PDK
1
4 52
PSD
1
4 52
2122 202122 20
PST2 9 117
37 3938
PST3
PFC
1
PFC
2
3839 37
PAGE 05-02
Pin 24 = FBP. Combination of the following.Fly back pulse: 1.5V ~ 3.0V H-AFC: This input is received from the Horizontal Blanking (H. Blk)signal generated in the Deflection circuit by Q706. This signal is used as a sample pulse in theHorizontal AFC circuit, which synchronizes the Horizontal Drive signal with the incoming Video syncsignal input at pin 16. In Through Mode, pin 8.Fly back pulse: 3.0V ~ 9.0V Max: This input is received from the Flex Converter and is acombination of Horizontal and Vertical blanking signals.H Blk from the Flex Converter Pin 12 through QC15V Blk from the Flex Converter Pin 4 through QC14Used within the Rainforest is for DC restoration, Pedestal level detection and Clamping signals, suchas Burst Gate Pulse.
0.9 ~ 2.1V Half ToneH-AFC 3.0V
SCP IN
3.7 ~ 9VCLAMP
1.7 ~ 3.3VBlack Peak
FBP IN YM/P-MUTE/BLK
2.4 ~ 5.8V P Mute
Max 9V
BLK 1.5V0 ~ 0.5V Internal
6.2 ~ 9V Blanking
Pin 17 Pin 24 Pin 52
DP-1X RAINFOREST IC INFORMATION (IC01)
Pin 17 = SCP.Black Peak: This input is utilized for establishing the Black Peak level used in Black Peak expansioncircuit. Here the Black Peak is expanded towards Black to increase the contrast ratio.CLAMP: The clamp pulse is utilized for DC restoration and blanking timing.
Pin 52 = YM/P-MUTE/BLK. Combination of the following.INTERNAL: 0.0V ~ 0.5V Used internal within the Rainforest IC.HALFTONE: 0.9V ~ 2.1V: This input is received from the Microprocessor and is used to establishthe Transparency effect of OSD. This also mutes the video in exact timing with On Screen Displaypulses (OSD). Half Tone from the Microprocessor Pin 40 through QC16.P MUTE: 2.4V ~ 5.8V: This input is received from the Video Mute Circuit and blanks the picturewhen there a loss of Vertical or Horizontal Sweep, AC is lost or the Microprocessor output a V MuteHigh signal during Channel Change, Child Lock, etc. Audio is also Muted during this time. See belowfor routing.V MUTE from the Microprocessor Pin 56 through D019, Q023, Q022, QC17 to pin 52 of IC01.AC LOSS through Q024, D021, to Q023, Q022, QC17 to pin 52 of IC01.VERTICAL SWEEP LOSS through QN05, QN04, QN02, PSD2 connector pin 3, D020 to Q023,Q022, QC17 to pin 52 of IC01.HORIZONTAL SWEEP LOSS through QN01, QN03, QN02, PSD2 connector pin 3, D020 to Q023,Q022, QC17 to pin 52 of IC01.
PAGE 05-03
DP-1X Automatic Brightness Limiter (ABL) Circuit Diagram Explanation
PAGE 05-04
(See Circuit Diagram on page 05-05) The ABL voltage is generated from the ABL pin (3) of the Flyback transformer, TH01. The ABL pull-up resistors are RH27 and RH28. They receive their pull up voltage from the B+ 115V2 ) line for Deflection generated from the Power Supply via TP91 pin 11, rectified by DP15, filtered by CP32 and then routed through the excessive current sensing resistor RP24. ABL VOLTAGE OPERATION The ABL voltage is determined by the current draw through the Flyback transformer. As the picture brightness becomes brighter or increases, the demand for replacement of the High Voltage being consumed is greater. In this case, the Flyback will work harder and the current through the Flyback increases. This in turn will decrease the ABL voltage. The ABL voltage is inversely proportionate to screen brightness. Also connected to the ABL voltage line is DH16. This zener diode acts as a clamp for the ABL voltage. If the ABL voltage tries to increase above 11V due to a dark scene which decreases the current demand on the flyback, the ABL voltage will rise to the point that DH16 dumps the excess voltage into the 11 line. ACCL TRANSISTOR OPERATION The ABL voltage is routed through the PSD2 connector pin 2, through the acceleration circuit RC62 and DC02 to the base of QX18. Under normal conditions, this transistor is nearly saturated. QX18 determines the voltage being supplied to the cathode of DC01, which is connected to pin 53 of the Rainforest IC, IC01. During an ABL voltage decrease due to an excessive bright circumstance, the base of QX18 will go down, this will drop the emitter voltage which in turn drops the cathode voltage of DC01. This in turn will pull voltage away from pin 53 of the Rainforest IC, IC01. Internally, this reduces the contrast and brightness voltage which is being controlled by the I2C bus data communication from the Microprocessor arriving at pins 30 and 31 of the Rainforest IC and reduces the overall brightness, preventing blooming as well as reducing the Color saturation level to prevent color smear. SUB BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT - I2C Alignment The purpose for the Sub Brightness Adjustment alignment is to set up the Lowest DC level to which the Brightness control voltage can be set. Again, this voltage is controlled internally within IC01 via I2C bus data from the Microprocessor arriving at pins 30 and 31. The adjustment is performed within the Service Menu. To enter this adjustment menu, with the set turned off, press and hold the Input button, then press the Power button. This will bring up a Service Menu. In the first Page of the menu, the 2nd selection is Sub Bright Adj [SUB BRT]. Selection is made using the cursor Up/Down buttons and adjusting the data values are made using the Cursor Left/Right buttons. In the field it is very difficult to make this adjustment according to factory specifications. However, there is a relatively easy way to do this adjustment and get if relatively close to factory specs.
1) Start adjustment 20 minutes or more after the power is turned on. 2) Receive a tuner signal. 3) Set the contrast and color controls to minimum. 4) Set the brightness to minimum position on the display. 5) The room light should be very low.
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE Adjust Sub Brightness (Number 2) SUBBRT, so that only the brightest points of the picture can be seen on screen. USING A GENERATOR:
1. Use the input signal below, (GRAY SCALE) 2. Adjust Sub Brightness (Number 2), so that the first bar sinks to black and the second bar is slightly
visible, using I2C Bus alignment procedure.
Mic
ropr
oces
sor
I001
CC
3110
Sign
alPW
B
DP1
X C
HA
SSIS
A.B
.L. C
IRC
UIT
DIA
GR
AM
DC
01R
C57
CC
27
53
3
9
To F
ocus
CH
14
10
RH
28R
H27
Hig
h V
olta
ge B
+ 11
5V V
2
Sw +
11V
SW +
9VR
C62
RC
58IC
01R
ainf
ores
tIC IC
01
ABL
SDA
2SD
A2
To A
node
s
AB
L
To Q
H01
Col
lect
or o
f Hig
h V
olta
geO
utpu
t Tra
nsis
tor
Sign
alPW
B
Def
lect
ion
PWB
Cla
mp
AB
L Pu
ll-U
p R
esis
tors
As B
righ
tnes
s goe
s Up,
ABL
Vol
tage
goe
s Dow
n. (I
nver
se P
ropo
rtio
nal)
[ Cur
rent
Pat
h ]
QC
18R
C61
RC
59
31
PAGE 05-05
DH
16
RH
31
Def
lect
ion
B+
115V
V2
PSD
2
2
DC
02
CC
30
CC
28
SCL2
SCL2
30 TH01
RH
21
LH01
CH
18
C72
7R
750
To S
ide
Pin
Cus
hion
Circ
uitR
C60
RC
82
RC
83
59 60
QH
0327
K56
K33
K
RH
29
V S
QU
RH
30
XR
ayPr
otec
tR
H32
DH
15N
OT
IN 1
6X9
MO
DEL
S
Side
Pin
Cus
hion
Mod
ulat
or
Q70
1
TV1V
TV2V
S-Y
1S-
C1
PinP
TU
NE
R (M
ono)
Alw
ays P
inP
DP-
1X S
ERIE
S C
HA
SSIS
NTS
C S
YN
C S
IGN
AL
PATH
IX01
Lum
/Aud
io S
elec
tor
IC
18
103V
VO
ut1
U50
2
Avx
3 In
PinP
Vid
eo
2422 30
Term
inal
PW
B
Sign
al P
WB
2 of
2
Fron
t Con
trol
PW
B
18
Mai
nV
ideo
NTS
C
Aux
Inpu
t 3
V1
15 17
Aux Inputs
U50
1M
ain
Tun
er63
Q50
5
5 3
S-Y
3S-
C3
26S-
3 In
S-1
In19
S-Y
2S-
C2
V2
8 10S-
2 In
12
S D
et.
S D
et.
S D
et. 18
Q50
6
13
V3V
PST1
PFT
PAGE 05-06
1
PST2
Sub
Vid
eo
VO
ut2
3
Mai
n Y
/Vid
eo
I005
X1
X0
13 12
Q56
3
Q56
1
I001
Q00
8
14
24
Mai
n Su
bSD
Det
53 44
QX
04
QX
05
Q01
428
Mai
n fo
rC
CD
&V
Chi
p
30Su
b fo
rV
. Chi
pD
ata
Q01
3
SDSe
l
SIG
NAL
PW
B 1
of 2
Com
posi
te 2
Com
posi
te 1
Q43
4
Q43
7
Q43
1
Q43
3C
ompo
nent
Y
Com
posi
te 3
Aux
Inpu
t 1
Aux
Inpu
t 2
See Main/Component SyncSeparation Circuit Diagram
Mic
roPr
oces
sor
Lo =
MA
INH
i = S
UB
LoHi
Y1
Y0
15
6
1 2
Mai
n/Su
bA
FC
1 60
For 4
80i
Com
pO
nly
CC
D&
V C
hip
Com
p1 In
Com
p2 In
Inpu
t 4
Inpu
t 5
Inpu
t 4
Inpu
t 5
Sub
AFC
Mai
n A
FC
Q01
5
Q01
6
Q00
7
Q01
1Q
010
Sync
Sep
Sync
Sep
Q00
9
Q01
2
Q01
7
9
910
11
Q00
649
HB
lk
Q00
555
VB
lk
PF
C2 U
C01
FC3
Uni
t
PF
C1
Sele
ct2
Sub V Sync
Sele
ct 2
IX08
V S
ync
PT
S2H
Syn
c
SHiN
DP
-1X
SE
RIE
S C
HA
SSIS
MA
IN/C
OM
PO
NE
NT
SY
NC
SE
PA
RA
TIO
N S
IGN
AL
PA
TH
PAGE 05-07
1
IX07
1 2
IX04
Mai
nY
Pr/
Pb
Sele
ctor
23 222
1011
1510
1213
4
8 7 15 14
Sub
H. S
ync
Sub
V. S
ync
IX06 1 2 1 2
4
9 9
4
5
IX05
22 23
H.O
ut
V.O
ut
3 5
TER
MIN
AL
PW
B
Flex Converter
MH
iN
MV
iN
SViN
Sub
YP
r/P
bSe
lect
or
Sele
ct 2
Hi :
13
to 1
4L
o : 1
2 to
14
Sele
ct 3
Hi :
2 to
15
Lo
: 1 to
15
Sele
ct 4
Hi :
3 to
4L
o : 5
to 4
Sele
ct 2
Sele
ct 4
3
Sele
ct 3
See
Com
pone
ntSi
gnal
Pat
h
16 18 20
See
Vid
eoSi
gnal
Pat
h
PT
S3 1314
IX07
Fro
mIX
03
IX06
V.S
ync
Out
H.S
ync
Out
2
1214
Mai
n Y
9
Inpu
t 4 Y
Inpu
t 5 Y
Sub
Y35
IX03
NT
SCSu
bV
ideo
Chr
oma
Pre
para
tion
IC
40
13
6
Sub
Y
Sub
C
Sub H
Syn
c O
ut
Sub V
Syn
c O
ut
1 21510
Sele
ct 3
12 13
34
13
1011
Mai
n V
. Syn
c N
otth
roug
h IX
08
NT
SCM
ain
Vid
eoP
repr
atio
n IC
I501
131413 14
3 65
Mai
n H
. Syn
c N
otth
roug
h IX
08
Inpu
t 4 Y
Inpu
t 5 Y
SIG
NA
L P
WB
14
14
Show
n T
wic
e
Show
n T
wic
e
11 11
Fro
mS
ele
ctor
IC IX
01
Fro
m3 D
Y/C
36Su
b H
Syn
c
V.S
ync
H.S
ync
37Su
bV
.Syn
c
36
37V
Syn
cSu
b V
Syn
c
11V
Syn
c
10H
Syn
c
43 3 10 11
See
Vid
eoSi
gnal
Pat
h
Sub
H S
ync
YO
ut
PBO
ut
PRO
ut
3 43
Alvie W Rodgers
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DP-1X CHASSIS
ADJUSTMENT INFORMATION
SECTION 6
Alvie W Rodgers
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
DP-1X CHASSIS ADJUSTMENT ORDER
It is necessary to follow an order when doing adjustments in the DP-1X chassis.
DP-1X SERVICE ADJUSTMENT ORDER “PREHEAT BEFORE BEGINNING”
Order Adjustment Item Screen Format Signal DCU Data Pre HEAT (30 Minutes) Normal Mode NTSC N/A
1 Cut Off Normal Mode NTSC N/A
2 Pre Focus Lens and Static Normal Mode NTSC N/A
3 DCU Phase Data Setting Normal Mode NTSC N/A
4 DCU Phase Data Setting 16X9 HD 2.14H HD Not for 16X9 Models
5 Horz. Position Adj. (Coarse) Normal Mode NTSC N/A
6 Horz. Position Adj. (Coarse) 16X9 HD 2.14H N/A
7 Raster Tilt Normal Mode NTSC CLEAR
8 Beam Alignment Normal Mode NTSC CLEAR
9 Raster Position Normal Mode NTSC CLEAR
10 Vertical Size Adjust Normal Mode NTSC CLEAR
11 Horz. Size Adjust Normal Mode NTSC CLEAR
12 Beam Form Normal Mode NTSC
13 Lens Focus Adjust Normal Mode NTSC
14 Static Focus Adjust Normal Mode NTSC
15 Blue Defocus Normal Mode NTSC Color Bar
16 White Balance Adjustment Normal Mode NTSC
17 Sub Brightness Adjustment Normal Mode NTSC
18 Sub Picture Adjustment Normal Mode NTSC
19 Horz. Position Adjust (Fine) Normal Mode NTSC Clear to start
20 Horz. Position Adjust (Fine) 16X9 HD 2.14H
21 DCU Character Set Up Normal & HD NTSC/1080i HD Not for 16X9 Models
22 DCU Pattern Set Up Normal & HD NTSC/1080i HD Not for 16X9 Models
23 Convergence Alignment Normal & HD NTSC/1080i HD Not for 16X9 Models
24 Sensor Initialize Normal & HD NTSC/1080i HD Not for 16X9 Models
25 PIP Amplitude Adjustment Normal Mode NTSC
PAGE 06-01
DP-1X CHASSIS PRE-HEAT RUN ADJUSTMENTS
PRESET EACH ADJUSTMENT VR TO CONDITION AS SHOWN: 1. Before Pre Heat Run.
Enter I2C Service Menu. Pre-set the Green DRV and Red DRV to 3F. This is considered “Center” position. (With power Off, press the SOURCE button on front panel and then press the POWER ON button then release. The Service Menu is displayed.)
2. SCREEN VR ON FOCUS PACK.
Pre Set fully counter clockwise.
3. Focus VR on focus pack. Pre Set fully clockwise. Allow set to operate at least 30 Minutes before beginning adjustments.
SCREEN VR
FOCUS VR
Projection Front View
R G B
R G B
Screen VR
Focus VR
FOCUS PACK
RED CRT GREEN CRT BLUE CRT
PAGE 06-02
DP-1X CHASSIS CUT-OFF (SCREENS) ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT PREPARATION: • Pre Heat Run should be
finished. • Be sure Screen Color
Temperature setting is in the COOL mode on Cus-tomer’s Menu.
• Room Light should be minimal.
ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE: 1) Go to I2C ADJ. Mode.
(With power Off, press the SOURCE button on front panel and then press the POWER ON button then release. The Service Menu is displayed.)
2) Set R DRV (COOL) to center data value (3F).
3) Set G DRV (COOL) to center data value (3F).
4) Set R, G, and B CUTOFF (COOL) data settings to [80].
5) Adjust Screen VRs on Fo-cus Pack fully counter clock wise.
6) Choose SERVICE item [1] of I2C ADJ. Mode. Select CURSOR RIGHT [!] and the Vertical will collapses.
7) Adjust any Screen VR. Screen VR should be turned clockwise gradually until that particular color is barely visible.
8) Repeat for the other two colors.
9) Exit SERVICE by press-ing the cursor on remote to the left [◄ ].
10)Exit SERVICE MENU by pressing the MENU key on remote.
Projection Front View
R G B
R G B
Screen VR
Focus VR
FOCUS PACK
RED CRT GREEN CRT BLUE CRT
PAGE 06-03
DP-1X CHASSIS PRE-FOCUS ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT PREPARATION: A) Pre Heat Run should be finished. FOCUS ADJUSTMENT: 1) Short the 2pin sub-
miniature connector on the CRT PWB (PTS), to remove any color not being adjusted and adjust one color at a time. (The adjustment order of R, G and B is just an example.)
2) Adjust the Focus VR for Red until Focus is achieved. (A Fine Adjust-ment will be made later.)
3) Repeat for Blue and Green.
Projection Front View
R G B
R G B
Screen VR
Focus VR
FOCUS PACK
RED CRT GREEN CRT BLUE CRT
NOTE: • PTSR connector on RED
CRT PWB. • PTSG connector on GREEN
CRT PWB. • PTSB connector on BLUE
CRT PWB.
PAGE 06-04
DP-1X CHASSIS DCU CROSSHATCH PHASE ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Preparation: • Cut Off adjustment should
be finished. • Video Control: Brightness
90%, Contrast Max. Adjustment Procedure: NORMAL MODE 1) Receive any NTSC signal. 2) Screen Format is Normal 3) Press the SERVICE
ONLY switch on the Con-vergence PWB to enter DCAM.
4) Press the HELP key on the Remote, Green Cross hatch appears.
5) Then press the EXIT key. (This is the Phase adjustment mode).
6) Adjust data value using the keys indicated in the chart, until the data matches the values indi-cated in the chart.
Exiting Adjustment Mode: 7) Press Help key on remote
control. 8) Press PIP MODE key
TWICE to store the information.
9) When Green dots are displayed, press the MUTE key twice to re-turn to DCAM grid.
16X9 HD Mode Adjustment Mode: (Not for 16X9 Models) 10) Change the Display
Format to 16X9 HD Mode.
11) Repeat steps 3 through 9 for the 16X9 HD mode.
Shortcut to change to 16X9 HD MODE NOTE: Remote still in DCA mode. a) Press the EXIT key on
Remote Control 5 times to exit to video mode.
b) Change input to receive 1080i signal.
c) Change format to 16X9 HD. Top and bottom pan-els should now be black.
d) Exit Menu. e) Press the Service Only
Switch. DCAM grid
should now appear in the 16X9 HD mode.
*DCA stands for (Digital Convergence Adjustment)
PHASE MODE
Display Format NORMAL
ADJUST USING Address Data Value Address Data Value
4 and 6 keys on Remote PH-H BF PH-H BF
2 and 5 keys on Remote PH-V 07 PH-V 07
Cursor Left ! and Right " on Remote CR-H 4C CR-H 4C
Cursor Up # and Down $ on Remote CR-V 0C CR-V 0C
Display Format 16X9 HD
PAGE 06-05
DP-1X CHASSIS HORIZONTAL PHASE (COARSE) ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Preparation: • Video Control: Brightness
90%, • Contrast Max. Adjustment Procedure NORMAL MODE: 1) Receive any NTSC cross-
hair signal. 2) Screen Format is NOR-
MAL. 3) Press the SERVICE
ONLY switch on the con-vergence PWB and dis-play the Digital Conver-gence Crosshatch pattern.
4) Mark the center of the Digital Convergence Crosshatch Pattern with finger.
5) Press the SERVICE ONLY switch to return to normal mode.
6) Enter the I2C Service Menu and select Item H POSI and adjust the data so that the center of Video matches the loca-tion of the Digital Cross-hatch pattern noted in step {4}.
7) Exit from the I2C Menu.
16X9 HD Mode Adjust-ment: NOTE: I2C Service Menu Can Not be entered in the 16X9 HD Mode. 8) Receive any 1080i
(2.14H) signal. 9) Change Screen Format
16X9 HD mode. 10) Press the SERVICE
ONLY switch on the de-flection PWB and display the Digital Convergence Crosshatch pattern.
11) Mark the center of the Digital Convergence Crosshatch Pattern with finger.
12) Press the SERVICE ONLY switch to return to normal mode.
13) Power Set OFF and back ON or change FORMAT to NORMAL.
14) Enter the I2C Bus align-ment menu and select Item [9] H POSI
15) Press SELECT key on Remote Control. (H POSI) option is changed to HD mode. H POSI H appears). H POSI data of
16X9 HD mode can now be changed.
16) Adjust the data up or down slightly.
17) Exit from the I2C Menu. 18) Change Screen Format to
16X9 HD mode. 19) Confirm that the Center
of Video matches the Center of the DCU Cross-hatch determined in step (11).
20) If the Horizontal Position isn’t correct, repeat steps (8) through (18) until cen-ter is matched.
NOTE: To enter the I2C Bus alignment menu, with Power Off, press the INPUT button and hold it down, then press the POWER button and re-lease. I2C adjustment menu will appear.
PAGE 06-06
DP-1X CHASSIS TILT (RASTER INCLINATION) ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Preparation: • The set can face any direc-
tion. • Receive the Cross-Hatch
Signal • VIDEO CONTROLS:
Factory Preset. • SCREEN FORMAT:
should be NORMAL mode. • The lens focus should have
been coarse adjusted. • The electrical focus should
have been coarse adjusted. • The Digital Convergence
RAM should be cleared. (Turn power off, press and hold the SERVICE ONLY switch on the Convergence PWB, then press the POWER button).
Adjustment Procedure : GREEN: 1) Apply covers to the RED
and BLUE lenses or short the 2P Sub Mini connector [PTS] on R&B CRT PWB to produce only GREEN.
2) Turn the Green deflection yoke and adjust the TILT until the green is level.
3) [+/- 2mm tolerance]. See diagram.
RED: 4) Remove cover or PTS
short from RED CRT and align RED with GREEN.
5) [+/- 1mm tolerance when compared to Green]
BLUE: 6) Remove cover or PTS
short from BLUE and cover the RED CRT. Align BLUE with GREEN.
7) [+/- 1mm tolerance when compared to Green]
After Completion: 8) Tighten DY Yoke Screws
to 12+/-2 kg-cm. 9) REMOVE ALL COVERS
or SHORTS on the PTS connectors.
10)Turn the power off.
l =< 2mm
Vertical Center axis of Cross-Hair signal
l
PAGE 06-07
DP-1X CHASSIS BEAM ALIGNMENT ADJUSTMENT
Preparation for adjustment: • Pre Heat, Pre-optical focus, DCU
Phase Data, H. POSI Course and Raster Tilt adjustment should be completed.
• Brightness: 90% • Contrast Max. • Receive cross hatch signals, or
dot pattern • RASTER TILT adjustment
should be finished. • SCREEN FORMAT should • be NORMAL mode. Adjustment procedure: 1) Green (G) tube beam alignment
adjustment: Short-circuit 2P subminiature connector plug pins of Red (R) and Blue (B) on the CRT boards and project only Green (G).
2) Put Green (G) tube beam align-ment magnet to the cancel state as shown in Figure 1.
3) Turn the Green (G) static focus VR counterclockwise all the way and make sure of position of cross hatch center on screen.
4) Turn Green (G) static focus VR clockwise all the way.
5) Turn two Beam alignment mag-net in any desired direction and move cross hatch center to posi-tion found in step (3). (See Fig-ure 2 below).
6) If image position does not shift when Green static focus VR is turned, adjustment complete.
7) If image position does move, repeat steps [2] through [6].
8) Conduct beam alignment for
Red and Blue in the same way. 9) Red (R) focus on focus pack. 10) Blue (B) focus on focus pack. 11) Upon completion of adjust-
ment, place a small amount of white paint on the beam align-ment magnets, to assure they don’t move. (If available).
The figure shows that the long and short knobs of the 2P magnet are aligned, this is the cancel state.
Figure 1
(NO ADJUSTMENT)ZERO FIELD SPACER
PICTURE TUBE SIDE
4-POLE BEAM SHAPECORRECTION MAGNET
2-POLE BEAMALIGNMENT MAGNET
ADJUSTMENTTABS BEAM SHAPE &
ALIGNMENT MAGNET
Figure 2 NOTE: This is the Centering Magnet not the Beam Alignment Magnets. This is just shown for reference, but the principle remains the same.
PAGE 06-08
DP-1X CHASSIS RED AND BLUE RASTER OFF SET ADJUSTMENT
INFORMATION: Raster Off set is necessary to conserve Memory allocation. It is very important to remember that the Red is off-set Left of Center and Blue is off-set Right of center. Please use the following information to accurately offset Red and Blue from center. Also see Overlay Dimensions for further details. Preparation for adjustment: • With Power Off, press the Service Only switch on the Convergence PWB. While holding the Service Only
Switch down, press the Power On button and Release. DCU Grid will appear without convergence correc-tion. NOTE: After entering DCAM, with each press of the Service Only Switch, the picture will toggle be-tween Video mode and DCU Grid.
• Video Control should be set at Factory Preset condition. • Static Focus adjustment should be finished. Adjustment Procedure 1. Turn the centering magnets of Red, Green and Blue and adjust so that the center point of the cross-hatch
pattern satisfies the diagram below. (DCU data is cleared). Remember Green is Centered. Red is to the left of Green and Blue is to the right of Green as indicated below.
• All Vertical positions are geometric center of screen. • Parameters are +/- 2mm.
DP15/DP15E/DP15F
L1 L2
DP14G L1 L2 DP17 L1 L2
61 inch 15mm 15mm 61 inch 15mm 25mm 61 inch 15mm 25mm
53 inch 15mm 25mm 53 inch 20mm 25mm 53 inch 20mm 25mm
43 inch 20mm 25mm (43UDX) 35mm (43FDX) 43 inch 25mm 30mm
PAGE 06-09
Red Blue
Geometric Horizontal Center
Green
Geometric Vertical Center
L1 L2
PAGE 06-10
DP-1X VERTICAL SIZE ADJUSTMENT
VERTICAL SIZE: 1) Receive an NTSC signal. 2) With Power Off, press the
Service Only switch on the Convergence PWB. While holding the Service Only Switch down, press the Power On button and Re-lease. DCU Grid will ap-pear without convergence correction. NOTE: After entering DCAM, with each press of the Service Only Switch, the picture will toggle between Video mode and DCU Grid.
3) Select GREEN (A/CH) and press the MENU but-ton to remove Red and Blue.
4) Adjust using R607 (Vertical Size Adj. VR) to match marks on the Over-lay. (See Figure Below)
NOTE: Centering magnet may be moved to facilitate. Distance is important, not centering. NOTE: The Vertical Fre-quency is shared between Normal and 16X9 HD modes. Alternate Method: Adjust Vertical Size until the size matches the chart below.
VERTICAL SIZE
l 5th LINE FROM CENTER
Between the horizon-tal line at the top and
the bottom.
Vertical Hash Mark
Vertical Hash Mark
DP15/DP15E/DP15F L=
DP14G/DP17 L=
61 inch 795mm 61 inch 665mm
53 inch 690mm 53 inch 580mm
43 inch 560mm 43 inch 470mm
PAGE 06-11
l
DP-1X HORIZONTAL SIZE ADJUSTMENT
HORIZONTAL SIZE: (Display Mode NORMAL) • Install the correct Overlay. • Input an NTSC Signal. • Digital Convergence RAM
should be cleared. With Power Off, press the Service Only switch on the Conver-gence PWB. While holding the Service Only Switch down, press the Power On button and Release. DCU Grid will appear without convergence correction. NOTE: After entering DCAM, with each press of
the Service Only Switch, the picture will toggle between Video mode and DCU Grid.
• Project only the Green raster by selecting Green Adjustment mode and press-ing the MENU button on remote.
ADJUSTMENT 1) Adjust using R711 (Horz.
Size Adj. VR) to match marks on the Overlay. (See Figure Below)
2) Press “Power Off” to exit DCAM. (Digital Conver-
gence Adjustment Mode.) Alternate Method: Adjust Horizontal Size until the size matches the chart be-low.
Between Outside Lines
HORIZONTAL SIZE
Overlay Hash Mark
Overlay Hash Mark
DP15 DP15F DP15E
L=
DP14G L= DP17 L=
61 inch 1175mm 61 inch 1250mm 61 inch 1250mm
53 inch 1020mm 53 inch 1060mm 53 inch 1105mm
43 inch 825mm 43 inch 880mm
6th Line From
Center
6th Line From
Center
DP-1X BEAM FORM ADJUSTMENT
(NO ADJUSTMENT)ZERO FIELD SPACER
PICTURE TUBE SIDE
4-POLE BEAM SHAPECORRECTION MAGNET
2-POLE BEAMALIGNMENT MAGNET
ADJUSTMENTTABS
a
b
Figure 1 Figure 2
BEAM SHAPE (FORM) Preparation for adjustment • IMPORTANT: Screen format
should be “NORMAL“. • Pre Heat, Cut-Off, Pre-optical
focus, DCU Phase Data, H. Pos Course, Raster Tilt, Beam Align-ment, Raster Position, Vertical and Horizontal Size adjustment should be completed.
• Brightness: 90%, Contrast: Max. • Input a NTSC DOT signal.
Adjustments procedure: 1) Green CRT beam shape adjust-
ment. 2) Short-circuit 2P sub-mini con-
nectors on Red and Blue CRT PWB to project only the Green beam.
3) Turn the green static focus VR fully clockwise.
4) Make the dot at the screen cen-ter a true circle, using the 4-Pole magnet shown in Figure 2 be-low.
5) Also adjust the Red and Blue CRT beam shapes according to the steps (1) to (4).
6) After the adjustment is com-pleted, return R, G and B static VRs to the Best Focus point.
PAGE 06-12
DP-1X LENS FOCUS ADJUSTMENT
Preparation for adjustment • Receive the Cross-hatch
pattern signal. • The electrical focus adjust-
ment should have been completed.
• Deflection Yoke tilt should have been adjusted.
• Brightness = 50% • Contrast = 60% to 70% Adjustment procedure 1) Short the 2 pin sub-
miniature connector on the CRT P.W.B. TS, to pro-duce only the color being adjusted and adjust one at a time. (The adjustment order of R, G and B is just an example.)
2) (See Figure 1) Loosen the fixing screw on the lens assembly so that the lens cylinder can be turned. (Be careful not to loosen the screw too much, as this may cause movement of the lens cylinder when tightening.)
3) Rotate the cylinder back and forth to obtain the best focus point, while observ-ing the Cross-Hatch. (Observe the center of the screen).
• Hint: Located just below
the screen are the two wooden panels. Remove the panels to allow access to the focus rings on the Lenses.
4) After completing optical focus, tighten the fixing screws for each lens.
5) When adjusting the Green Optical focus, be very careful. Green is the most dominant of the color guns and any error will be eas-ily seen.
6) Repeat Electrical Focus if necessary.
Figure 1
FIXING SCREW
LENS ASSEMBLY R, G, B.
Lens
Cylin
der
PAGE 06-13
DP-1X STATIC FOCUS ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTMENT PREPARATION: • Pre Heat Run should be
finished. FOCUS ADJUSTMENT: 1) Short the 2pin sub-
miniature connector on the CRT PWB (PTS), to remove any color not being adjusted and adjust one color at a time. (The adjustment order of R, G and B is just an example.)
2) Adjust the Focus VR for Red until maximum Focus is achieved.
3) Repeat for Blue and Green.
Projection Front View
R G B
R G B
Screen VR
Focus VR
FOCUS PACK
RED CRT GREEN CRT BLUE CRT
Screen VRs
Focus VRs
PAGE 06-14
DP-1X BLUE DE-FOCUS ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment Preparation: • Video Control: Brightness
90%, Contrast Max. • SCREEN FORMAT should
be PROGRESSIVE mode.
Adjustment Procedure 1) Receive any NTSC cross-
hatch signal. 2) Turn the B FOCUS VR
fully clockwise. 3) Adjust BLUE defocus ac-
cording to the following specifications.
1mm on each side equal-ing 2mm total. See figure Below.
Projection Front View
R G B
R G B
Screen VR
Focus VR
FOCUS PACK
RED CRT GREEN CRT BLUE CRT
Screen VRs
Focus VRs
Blue Defocus “Sticking Out”
Center of Blue crosshatch line
PAGE 06-15
Adjustment Conditions: • Cut Off and Blue Defocus
must be complete. • High brightness white bal-
ance • Low brightness white bal-
ance Screen adjustment VRs on Focus Block Drive adjustment performed using I2C Bus Alignment within Service Menu. Preparation for adjustment • Start adjustment 20 minutes
or more after the power is turned on.
• Turn the brightness and black level OSD to mini-mum by remote control.
• Receive a tuner signal, (any channel, B/W would be best).
• Set the drive adjustment within I2C Service Menu to their Data Centers (3F).
• Set Color Temperature to COOL on Customer’s Menu.
Adjustment procedure Sub Brightness: 1) Go to I2C ADJ. Mode.
With power Off, press IN-PUT and POWER but-tons at the same time, then release. Service Menu is displayed.
2) Adjust the Sub Brightness Number [2] SUBBRT us-ing I2C Bus alignment pro-cedure so only the slight-
est white portions of the raster can be seen.
3) Exit Service Menu by pressing MENU button.
4) Input a gray scale signal into any Video input and select that input using the SOURCE button on the remote or front control panel.
5) Turn the Brightness and Contrast OSD all the way up.
6) Enter the Service Menu again.
7) Make the whites as white as possible using the Red DRV (Cool) and Green DRV (Cool) Drive adjust-ment within I2C Service Menu . (10800K)
8) Set the Brightness and Contrast to minimum.
9) Adjust the low brightness areas to black and white, using screen adjustment VRs (red, green, blue) on the Focus Block assembly. (10800 K)
10) Check the high brightness whites again. If not OK, repeat steps 6 through 9.
11) Press the MENU key on remote to Exit Service Menu.
Remember: When adjusting the Screen controls. After the Cut Off adjustment has been completed, never adjust the controls clockwise. Always adjust counter clockwise. This lengthens tube life.
DP-1X WHITE BALANCE and SUB BRIGHTNESS ADJUSTMENT
Projection Front View
R G B
R G B
Screen VR
Focus VR
FOCUS PACK
RED CRT GREEN CRT BLUE CRT
Screen VRs
Focus VRs
PAGE 06-16
Adjustment Preparation: • Video Control: Brightness
90%, • Contrast Max. Adjustment Procedure NORMAL MODE: 1) Receive any NTSC cross-
hair signal. 2) Screen Format is NOR-
MAL. 3) Press the SERVICE
ONLY switch on the con-vergence PWB and display the Digital Convergence Crosshatch pattern.
4) Mark the center of the Digital Convergence Crosshatch Pattern with finger and press the SER-VICE ONLY switch to return to normal mode.
5) Enter the I2C Bus align-ment menu and select Item H POSI and adjust the data so that the center of Video matches the loca-tion of the Digital Cross-hatch pattern noted in step {4}.
6) Exit from the I2C Menu.
16X9 HD Mode Adjust-ment: NOT for the 16X9 aspect models. NOTE: I2C Service Menu Can Not be entered in the 16X9 HD Mode. 7) Receive any 1080i (2.14H)
signal. 8) Change Screen Format
16X9 HD mode. 9) Press the SERVICE
ONLY switch on the de-flection PWB and display the Digital Convergence Crosshatch pattern.
10) Mark the center of the Digital Convergence Crosshatch Pattern with finger and press the SER-VICE ONLY switch to return to normal mode.
11) Power set Off and then back On.
12) Enter the I2C Bus align-ment menu and select Item [9] H POSI
13) Press MENU key on R/C. (H POSI) option is changed to HD mode. H POSI H appears). The
data for H POSI 16X9 HD mode can now be changed.
14) Adjust the data up or down slightly.
15) Exit from the I2C Menu. 16) Change Screen Format to
16X9 HD mode. 17) Confirm that the Center
of Video matches the Center of the DCU Cross-hatch determined in step (10).
18) If the Horizontal Position isn’t correct, repeat steps (7) through (18) until cen-ter is matched.
NOTE: To enter the I2C Bus alignment menu, with Power Off, press the INPUT button and hold it down, then press the POWER button and re-lease. I2C adjustment menu will appear.
DP-1X HORIZONTAL POSITIONS (FINE) ADJUSTMENT
NORMAL MODE: Balance left and right side display position.
PAGE 06-17
NOTE: This instruction should be applied when a new DCU is being replaced. This DCU can be set up for three different types of wording during Intellisense. 1. INTELLISENSE 99
• Phillips 2. MAGIC FOCUS 77
• Hitachi 3. HD FOCUS AA
• Zenith Adjustment Preparation: 1. Receive NTSC RF or Video
Signal. 2. With Power Off, Press and
HOLD the SERVICE ONLY button on the Convergence/Focus PWB, then press the Power On/Off and release. When picture appears, release Service Only switch. (DCU grid is displayed without con-vergence correction data.
Adjustment Procedure: 1. Press the FREEZE key on R/
C. (One additional line appears near the top and bottom.
2. Press the PIP CH key, the ADJ. PARAMETER mode is displayed as following.
3. Press the ◄ or ► Cursor to change the ADJ. DISP. Data as follows; • 77 for HITACHI
DP-1X CHASSIS MAGIC FOCUS “CHARACTER SET UP”
ADJ.PARAMETER —–> ADJ. DISP. : 77 SEL. STAT. : 00 DEMO.WAIT : 2f
Not for 16X9 aspect
models. Parameter Normal Squeeze
ADJ.DISP 77 • SEL. STAT 00 • DEMO WAIT 2f • INT STEP 1 02 • INT A DLY 0a • INT C DLY 0a 5a INT BAR 1c • MGF STEP 1 00 • MGF A DLY 0a • MGF C DLY 0a 5a MGF BAR 0e • SENSOR CK 00 • SENSOR 0 ff • SENSOR 1 00 • SENSOR 2 ff • SENSOR 3 01 • SENSOR 4 ff • SENSOR 5 06 • SENSOR 6 ff • SENSOR 7 07 • AD LEVEL 03 • E. DISPLAY 00 • ADJ. TIMS 60 • AD LEVEL 05 • AD NOISE 80 • PHASE MOT 60 • H. BLK-RV 06 03 H. BLK-GV 01 • H. BLK-BV 06 03 H. BLK-H 00 • PON DELAY 0c • IR-CODE 00 • INITIAL 50 9e • MGF 50 96 • 9 POINT 50 fe • STAT 50 fe • DYNA 50 9f •
TABLE 1 DATA VALUES CONFIRMA-TION: 4. Use the Cursor ▼ and ▲ keys
to scroll through the ADJ. PA-RAMETER table. Confirm Data values in accordance with TABLE 1 to the right. To make data value changes, Press the ◄ or ► Cursor keys.
5. Press the PIP MODE key 2 time to write the changed data into EEPROM. (First press, ADJ PARAMETER ROM WRITE ? Is displayed for alarm. 2nd press writes data into EEPROM. Green dots ap-pear after completion of opera-tion).
6. Press the MUTE button 3 times exit.
16 X 9 HD MODE ADJ: 6. Input a 1080i signal. 7. Press the EXIT key on remote
5 time to exit to the video mode.
8. Change input to receive 1080i input.
9. Enter Customer’s Menu and select FORMAT. Change to Through Mode.
10. Exit Menu. 11. Press the Service Only Switch
to return to DCAM. 12. Repeat Steps 2 ~ 8. 13. Power set off.
PAGE 06-18
DP-1X CHASSIS MAGIC FOCUS “PATTERN SET UP”
NOTE: This instruction should be applied when a new DCU is being replaced. NOTE: This instruction shows how to set up the pattern position for Intellisense. Each model has a specific set up pattern position. Adjustment Preparation: • Receive NTSC RF or Video
Signal. • With Power Off, Press and
HOLD the SERVICE ONLY button on the Convergence/Focus PWB, then press the Power On/Off at the same time, until picture appears, then release both. (Picture is dis-played without conv. Correc-tion data. Press the Service Only button to bring up Inter-nal Crosshatch.)
Adjustment Procedure: 1. Press the FREEZE key on R/
C. (One additional line appears near the top and bottom.
2. Press the HELP key, the PAT-TERN mode is displayed as following.
3. Use the 6 Key to rotate Arrow. Arrow rotates clockwise with each press on the 6 Key.
4. Use the following Keys to switch color of patterns. • STATUS : GREEN • 0 : RED • ANT : BLUE
5. Press the ◄ or ► Cursor to
change the Pattern Position Data in horizontal Direction. Press the ▲ or ▼ Cursor keys to change the Pattern Position Data in Vertical Direction.
6. Set the Data Values as shown below.
7. Press the PIP MODE key 2 times to write the changed data into EEPROM. (First press, ADJ PARAMETER ? ROM WRITE ? Is displayed for alarm. 2nd press writes data into EEPROM. Green dots ap-pear after completion of opera-tion).
8. Press the MUTE button 3 times exit Pattern Mode.
16X9 HD MODE 9. CHANGE DISPLAY TO
16X9 HD MODE. 10. Press the EXIT key on R/C 5
times to exit to video mode. 11. Change input to receive 1080i
signal. 12. Change format to 16X9 HD.
Top and bottom panels should now be black.
13. Exit Menu. 14. Repeat Steps 2 through 8 15. Power set off.
RH : 02 RV : FF
0 1 2
6 5 4
7 3
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RH X 02 X fa X 02 X 04
RV X 00 X 00 X 02 X 00
GH X 00 X fa X 00 X 04
GV X 00 X 00 X 02 X 00
BH X 00 X fa X 00 X 04
BV X 00 X 00 X 02 X 00
NORMAL MODE:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
RH X 02 X fa X 02 X 06
RV X 00 X 00 X 02 X 00
GH X 00 X fa X 00 X 06
GV X 00 X 00 X 02 X 00
BH X 00 X fa X 00 X 06
BV X 00 X 00 X 02 X 00
16X9 HD MODE: V. SQUEEZE ACTIVATED Not in 16X9 aspect models.
PAGE 06-19
PAGE 06-20
DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
Complete Digital Convergence Alignment
Center the Overlay Jig geometrically on the screen
Clear RAM data (DCU RAM)
Select the External Center Cross Signal by pressingthe EXIT button 5 times, then the Remote SOURCEbutton .
No DCU Correction addedresults in severe
pincushion distortion
Center Magnet Adjustments
Press and hold the SERVICE ONLYSWITCH, then p ress the POWERButton and release, picture appears.Release the SERVICE ONLY SWITCHagain. DCU Grid appars.
InternalDigital "CrossHatch Signal"is projected
Service onlyswitch
is on theConvergence
PWB.
Receive any NTSC signal (Crosshair if possible)Set SCREEN FORMAT TO NORMAL mode
Align the G,R,B individualcenter crosses to theirrespective marks on theOverlay using the YokeCenter Magnets
Red = Left Blue = Right
Green = Center
See Offset Chart for exact distances Page 06-09
External Selected CenterCross with no DCU center
data
R G B
R G BFront View
Use the CenteringMagnets closest to
the Yoke
A
PAGE 06-21
DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
Press the Remote FREEZEbutton (extra lines will appear
at top and bottom)
Static Centering Alignments (Moves Entire Raster)Press EXIT 5 times to return to DCU Grid.
A
Press the Remote Cursorbuttons to match the selected
Crosshatch(red and blue) to the green.
Press the RemoteFREEZE button
to exit Raster Position.(extra lines will disappear)
Green should already be centered
Internal CrossHatch Signal
selected
B
Extra Linesappear
indicatingRasterMode
AdjustColor
Left
Adjust Color Up
Adjust Color Down
AdjustColorRight
Remote
OK
TO SELECT COLORSStatus : Selects GREEN0 : Selects REDANT : Selects BLUE
Align Red and Blue static centers
PAGE 06-22
DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
Press the Remote STATUSbutton 5 times to enter the
3X3 Adjustment Mode
Use the Remote 2, 4, 5, 6 numberbuttons to move the Adjustment Point
location (intersection of blinkingcursor) and the Cursor Buttons to
adjust the lines so that the green crosshatch align
with the Overlay (Jig)
Convergence 3x3 Point Adjustment Mode(Green Coarse Alignment)
Press the RemoteMENU button toproject the green
tube only
Selects GREEN
Before Adjustment
After Adjustment
Moves location ofAdjustment Point(Intersection ofblinking cursor)
Remote
Lines symmetricallyaligned at Adjustment
Points
Cursor blinksat intervals of3 to indicate
the 3X3Adjustment
Mode
C
Green Only
3X3 Mode =9 Adjustment Points
STATUSButton is used
for selecting the3X3 Adjustment
Mode (whenpressed 5
times).
(The 3X3 Modecan only be
entered whenthe DCU RAM
data is cleared)
B
Continue on next page
Remote
Adjusted by cursor keys
Press the Remote STATUS button to enter the Green
Adjustment Mode
Remote
OK
4 5 6
2
Status
PAGE 06-23
DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
Store the data tointerpolate as often as
necessary
Press the Remote INFO button toCalculate points in between the
adjustment points.
C
After interpolation, press the Remote 0 button to selectthe Red Convergence Adjustment Mode
0987654
Remote
0 Selects RED
Press the Remote 2,4,5,6 buttons to move theadjustment point, and the Cursor buttons to
converge the selected color onto green
Convergence 3x3 Mode (9 Point) Adjustment(Red / Blue Coarse Alignment)
Green alwaysprojected
SelectsBlue
Crosshatch isyellow when the red
and greencrosshatches align
Crosshatch is cyan when the blue andgreen crosshatches align
Has the Blue3x3 Convergence
Mode beenaligned?
Yes
Press MenuButton D
No
White internal crosshatchshould be projected
Calculation averages the error between thepoints to prevent "S" Distortion
Before Calculation
Press the RemoteANT button to Select
the Blue ConvergenceAdjustment Mode
Remote
Cursor Blinks Blue
Cursor blinksRED
ANT
PAGE 06-24
DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
Press the Remote STATUS buttonto project the green only
Convergence 7x5 Point Adjustment(Green Only Alignment)
D
Press the Remote 0 button fivetimes to enter the 7X5 mode
Selects the 7X5mode
Press the Remote INFO button toCalculate points in between the
adjustment points.
35 convergence adjustment points in 7X5 mode
E
Use the Remote Cursor and 2,4,5,6 buttons to perform convergencepoint adjustment at every other intersection of the crosshatch
AdjustColor
Left
Adjust Color Up
Adjust Color Down
AdjustColorRight
Remote
Selects GREEN
OK
Remote
If selected Color isn't already Red, itwill take 6 presses of 0 button
0
987654
Remote
Status
PAGE 06-25
DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
Press the Remote 0 button to projectthe Red/Green Crosshatch
0987654
Remote
Convergence 7x5 Point Adjustment(Red/Blue Alignment)
Press the Remote Cursor and 2,4,5,6buttons to perform convergence pointadjustment at every other intersectionof the crosshatch
Press the Remote ANT buttonto select the Blue Convergence
Adjustment Mode
Remote
Performadjustment atevery otherintersection
Has the Blue7X5 Convergence Mode
been aligned?
Yes
Press Menu Button
E
White InternalCrosshatchshould beprojected
Cursor BlinksBlue
Cursor blinks redat intervals of 2 toindicate the 7x5
mode
Selects Blue foradjustment
F
Press theRemote INFO
button toCalculate pointsin between the
adjustmentpoints.
OK
SelectsBlue
ANT
No
PAGE 06-26
DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
Convergence 13X9 Point Adjustment(Green Only Alignment)
F
Press the Remote A/CH buttonto project
the green only
Press the Remote ANTbutton five times to
enter the 13X9 mode
ANT
Remote
Pressed 5 times,Selects the13X9 mode
Use the Remote Cursor and 2,4,5,6buttons to perform convergence pointadjustment at every other intersectionof the crosshatch
117 convergenceadjustment points in
13X9 mode
GPress the Remote INFO button toCalculate points in between the
adjustment points.
AdjustColor
Left
Adjust Color Up
Adjust Color Down
AdjustColorRight
Remote
Selects GREEN
Remote
If selected Color isn't already Blue, it willtake 6 presses of Source button
Remote
OK
OK
4 5 6
2
Status
PAGE 06-27
DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
Press the Remote " 0 " button to enter RED Adjustment Modeand to project the Red/Green Crosshatch
0987654
RemoteConvergence 13X9 (117 Point)Adjustment (Red/Blue Alignment)
Press the Remote Cursor and2 , 4 , 5 , 6 b u t t o n s t o p e r f o r mconvergence point adjustment ate v e r y i n t e r s e c t i o n o f t h ecrosshatch
Press the Remote ANT buttonto select the Blue Convergence
Adjustment Mode
ANT
Remote
Performadjustment at
everyintersection
Has the Blue13X9 Convergence
Mode beenaligned?
Yes
Press the Menu Button toDisplay all colors
G
White InternalCrosshatchshould beprojected
Cursor Blinks Blue
Cursor blinks redindicating the13X9 mode
Selects Blue foradjustment
No
Press theRemote INFO
button toCalculate pointsin between the
adjustmentpoints.
H
AdjustColor
Left
Adjust Color Up
Adjust Color Down
AdjustColorRight
Remote
OK
PAGE 06-28
DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
Store New Convergence Data in ROM
H
Press the Remote PIP MODEbutton twice to save the data to
ROM mode = STORE
ROM WRITE?
This screen is projected at the firstpress of PIP MODE button
Screen goes blank for severalseconds at the second push of
the PIP MODE button
1 2
3
!!!! WARNING !!!!Sensor Initialization must be doneafter a Write to ROM, (STORE) in
order for MAGIC FOCUS to operate.If this is not done, when HD FOCUS
is run, a single Cross Hire will bedisplayed.
Return to the Digital Conv.Adjustment Mode and Initialize the
Sensors.
I
This screen appears with a series ofgreen dots indicating a successful
Write to ROM or Store.Note: If Red dots appear, retry the
process. If Red dots appear thesecond time, replace the Digital
Convergence module.
Press the Remote MUTE button toreturn to the Digital Convergence
Adjustment mode
PAGE 06-29
DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
Magic Focus Sensor Initialization
ROM WRITE?1
Again the screen projectsROM WRITE at the first
press of PIP MODE button
2
3
Press the MUTE Button to return to Crosshatch.Finished with Digital Convergence Setup for NORMAL mode.
Press the Service Only Switch to Exit to Normal Mode
I
INTELLISENSE
Press the Remote PIP CH button tobegin the Initialization Mode
Screen projects differentlight patterns during the
Initialization Mode
Press the Remote PIP MODE button once
CONVERGENCE ADJUSTMENT OPERATION COMPLETE
This screen appears with a series ofgreen dots indicating successful
sensor Data Initialization
+-SWAP PIP CH SOURCE FREEZE
NOT FOR 16 X 9 ASPECT MODELSSELECT 1080I (16 X 9 HD) Mode, Change screen format to 16X9 HD Mode.
Install the 16 X 9 HD Overlay. Press the Service Only Switch to enter theDCAM. Return to step (D) and aligh to the Overlay.
SHORTCUT TO CHANGE TO 16 X 9 HD MODE: 1) While in DCAM,
press the EXIT key on R/C 5 times to exit to video mode.
2) Change input to re-ceive 1080i signal.
3) Change format to 16 X 9 Through Mode using Cus-tomer’s Menu. Top and Bottom panels should now be black.
4) Exit Customer’s Menu.
5) Press the SERVICE ONLY SWITCH on the Convergence PWB to re-enter DCAM. DCAM grid should now appear.
6) Return to step D and continue in 16 X 9 Through Mode.
PAGE 06-30
DP-1X DIGITAL CONVERGENCE ALIGNMENT PROCEDURES
Enter the Service Mode by pressing theService Only Switch on Convergence PWB.
Convergence TouchupOverlays NOT required!
Convergence Point AdjustmentBe sure to input the correct signal for the paticular display that
need convergence touch up. NTSC (Normal) or 1080i (16 X 9 HD).
When adjustment is complete, STORE the NewDATA by pressing the PIP MODE button twice.Press the MUTE button to return to DCAM grid.
Press the Service Only Switchto Exit DCAM mode.
Press "0" five times to select the 7X5 ModePress "ANT" five times to select the 13X9 Mode
Note: 3X3 mode can not be entered without clearing RAM data.
Press 2, 4, 5, 6 buttons to move Adjustment PointPress Cursor Up / Down / Left / Right to Adjust Convergence
After Storing, initialize the INTELLISENS sensors by pressing thePIP MODE button ONCE and then press the PIP CH button.
Press the MUTE button to return to DCAM grid.See "Complete Digital Convergence
Alignment procedure" for more details.
Press the MENU button to Removecolors not being adjusted.
Cleared RAM data mode can be entered if necessary.Clear RAM data by pressing and holding the Service Only
button, then press the Power button. Press the Service Onlyswitch again to display the DCU Grid, then Read the Old ROM
data. (SWAP press twice)
MUTE STATUSSVCS
VCR PLUS+ INFO GUIDE/TVSCHD
PIP CHPIP FREEZE
PIP-MODE SWAP
PROG TV/VCR SLOW
REC
HITACHICLU-5711TSI
SELECTVOL CH
MENU EXIT
PIXHELP
ANT
0 LAST CHSLEEP
7 8 9
1 2 3
4 5 6
DVD AV1 AV2 AV3
SATCBLVCRTV
SOURCE WIZARD
POWER
CURSOR LEFT
BLUE (13X9)
REMOVECOLOR
CALCULATE
INITIALIZEPIP MODE +
PIP CH
WRITE TOROM
PRESS(2X)
READ OLDROM DATAPRESS (2X)
CENTERING
GREEN (3 X 3)
CORRECTIONBUTTONS
CROSSHATCHVIDEO
RASTER PHASE
RED (7 X 5)
REMOTE CONTROL CLU-5711 TSI (P/N HL01641)
PAGE 06-31
C.C. ASPECT
CURSOR UPCURSOR RIGHT
CURSOR DOWN
PIP ACCESS
VID1
VID2VID3
VID4
VID5
USED IN MODELS:61SWX10B, 61SWX12B53SWX10B, 53SWX12B43UWX10B, 53UWX10B61UDX10B, 53UDX10B43FDX11B, 43FDX10B
MUTE STATUSSVCS
VCR PLUS+ INFO GUIDE/TVSCHD
PIP CHPIP FREEZE
PIP-MODE SWAP
PROG TV/VCR SLOW
REC
HITACHICLU-5712TSI
SELECTVOL CH
MENU EXIT
PIXHELP
INPUT
0 LAST CHSLEEP
7 8 9
1 2 3
4 5 6
DVD AV1 AV2 AV3
SATCBLVCRTV
SOURCE WIZARD
POWER
CURSOR LEFT
BLUE (13X9)
REMOVECOLOR
CALCULATE
INITIALIZEPIP MODE +
PIP CH
WRITE TOROM
PRESS(2X)
READ OLDROM DATAPRESS (2X)
CENTERING
GREEN (3 X 3)
CORRECTIONBUTTONS
CROSSHATCHVIDEO
RASTER PHASE
RED (7 X 5)
REMOTE CONTROL CLU-5712 TSI (P/N HL01642)
PAGE 06-32
CURSOR UP
CURSOR RIGHT
CURSOR DOWN
PIP ACCESS
USED IN MODELS:53SBX10B
REMOTE CONTROL CLU-4311UG (P/N HL01651)Used with
60DX10B, 50DX10B43GX10B, 50GX30B
HP-1X ChassisPOWER
TV CBL/SAT DVD/VCR
PIP FREEZE
MOVESWAP
PIP CHHELP MENU
SELECT
MUTE LAST CHEXIT
VOL CH
0
7 8 9
1 2 3
4 5 6
HITACHICLU-4311UG
INPUT STATUS
PAGE 06-33
REC TV/VCR PIX
CURSOR LEFT
BLUE (13X9)
REMOVECOLOR
INITIALIZEPIP MODE +
PIP CH
WRITE TOROM
PRESS (2X)READ OLDROM DATAPRESS (2X) CENTERING
GREEN (3 X 3)
CORRECTIONBUTTONS
CROSSHATCHVIDEO
RASTER PHASE
RED (7 X 5)
CURSOR UP
CURSOR RIGHT
CURSOR DOWN
DP-1X MAGNET AND YOKE LOCATION
(5) Beam Alignment magnets(6) Focus Block Assembly
RED, GREEN & BLUE FOCUS CONTROAlso: SCREEN CONTROLS for RED, GREEN & BLUE
(1) Centering magnet RED(2) Centering magnet GREEN(3) Centering magnet BLUE(4) Beam Form Magnets
DP-1X MAGNETSAdjustment Points
RED CRT GREEN CRT BLUE CRT
21 3
4
5
64
4
5
5
FRONT
PAGE 06-34
DP-1X SUB PICTURE AMPLITUDE ADJUSTMENT
Preparation for Adjustment • Sub Brightness adjustment
should be finished. • Start adjustment 20 minutes
after the power is turned on. • Condition should be set as
follows: • Contrast = MAX • Brightness = Center • Press “PIP” button on Re-
mote Control. PIP appears on screen
• Select Single mode. Receive NTSC white signal, for the Main Picture and the Sub-Picture. (Do not use Com-ponent Signals).
• Connect Probe on the P852 (CRT PWB — Green) to check sub-picture ampli-tude.
Adjustment Procedure 1) Go to I2C adjustment
Mode. 2) Press “MENU” on remote
to scroll through adjust-ment pages, until TA1270-M appears at the top of the page.
3) Press “PIP CH” on re-mote control, TA1270-M changes to TA1270-S.
4) Observe P852 on the CRT PWB and change the TA1270-S “SUB CNT” I2C data so that the ampli-tude of the Sub Picture is the same level as that of the main picture. Shown below.
5) Exit Service Menu.
Main Picture White Sub Picture White Should Match Main
1 H
ADJUST MODE TA1270-M TINT (TV) 3C TOFFO (TV) 00 TOFQ 00 SUB CNT 0F SUB CLR
Sub Picture
ADJUST MODE TA1270-S TINT (TV) 3C TOFFO (TV) 00 TOFQ 00 SUB CNT 0F SUB CLR
Sub Picture
Press PIP CH
Enter I2C adjustment Menu. Press Menu and scroll through
pages until TA1270-M appears.
Adjust SUB CNT until peak white of PinP matches peak white of the main picture.
PAGE 06-35
PAGE 06-36
MAGIC FOCUS ERROR CODES FOR THE DP-1X CHASSIS
CONVERGENCE ERRORS: If an error message or code appears while performing MAGIC FOCUS or initialize (PIP MODE and PIP CH in Digital Convergence Adjustment Mode, follow this confirmation and repair method. 1) Turn on Power and receive any signal. 2) Press the Service Only Switch on the Convergence Output PWB. 3) Press SWAP and then the PIP CH buttons on the remote control. 4) Error code will be displayed in bottom right corner of screen. 5) If there is no error, and INITIAL OK will appear on screen.
ERROR!!
X
Error Code CONNECT 1! No. 1 3
Error Message
Sensor Position
6) Follow repair table for errors. ERROR!!.
Error
Display Code
Countermeasure
Application
Initialize Magic Focus
1 VF Error Replace DCU X X
2 *2
Connect 1 1. Darken Outside Light 2. Placing of Sensor 3. Is pattern hitting sensor? 4. Check connection and solder bridge of sensor 5. Replace Sensor. 6. Replace Sensor PWB. 7. Sensor Connector check. 8. Replace DCU. 9. Adjustment check (H/V size, centering).
X
—
3*2 A/D Level Same as Error Code 2 X X
4 Over Flow 1. Check the placement 2. Adjustment check (H/V size, centering). 3. Conv. Amp. Gain check*1 (check resistor values
only)
X
X
5 Convergence Same as Error Code 4 X X
7 Operation Same as Error Code 4 — X
9 Connect 2 Same as Error Code 2 X X
10 Noise Input strong field. Strong signal. Check the wiring of connector between sensor and DCU
X X
11 Sync Input strong field. Strong signal. Check the wiring of connector between sensor and DCU
X X
Error Code
*1 = RK 42, 46, 50, 54, 58, 62 check these resistors. *2 = Sensor Position
DP-1X CHASSIS
AUDIO INFORMATION
SECTION 7
Alvie W Rodgers
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
V323 17
Aux
3 L
eft
Aux
3 R
ight
2578
Fron
t Con
trol P
WB
U50
1M
ain
Tune
r62 64
15 16
SIG
NAL
PW
B
Rig
ht O
utLe
ft O
ut4543
SEL
OU
T
DP-
1X C
hass
is A
udio
(Mai
n-Te
rmin
al) S
igna
l Pat
h
TER
MIN
AL P
WB
MO
NO
UTIX
01A
/V S
elec
t
2627TV
Mai
n L
TV M
ain
R
V116 18
Aux
1 L
eft
Aux
1 R
ight
V29 11
Aux
2 L
eft
Aux
2 R
ight
V42 4
Aux
4 L
eft
Aux
4 R
ight
V559 61
Aux
5 L
eft
Aux
5 R
ight
MO
N38 40
Mon
itor O
ut L
eft
Mon
itor O
ut R
ight
PST1 10 11
8 7
PSU
1
PST1
SRS
PWB
(See
SR
S Au
dio
Circ
uit
Dia
gram
)
11 10
SEL
RSE
L L
FRFL
JA01 R L
HiF
i Out
HiF
i Out
24
IJ01
- + - +
7
Fron
t Aud
io O
utTA
8200
AH
QJ0
1Se
e AV
Mut
eC
ircui
tD
iagr
am
See
AV M
ute
Circ
uit
Dia
gram
42PRFR
(WO
) Out
FR (T
W) O
ut
42PL12
FL (W
O) O
ut
FL (T
W) O
utQ
J02
SIG
NAL
PW
B
PFT
SIG
NAL
PW
B
PAGE 07-01
DP-
14G
, 15,
15F
, PP1
5, Z
P14
Seri
es C
hass
is T
ruSu
rrou
nd /
SRS
AU
DIO
Cir
cuit
(Thi
s Cir
cuit
is n
ot fo
r th
e D
P-17
) (Al
so, s
ee A
udio
Mai
n an
d Te
rmin
al P
WB
Cir
cuit)
ERR
Mut
e65
V M
ute
2
IA01
Aud
io C
ontr
ol
Mut
e
VM
ute
PSU
1
Out
to H
iFi R
QA
05
QA
06D
A02
DA
04
DA
01D
A03
SCL2
1SC
L
SDA
22
SDA
Sele
ct R
7R
In
Sele
ct L
8L
In
R O
ut
L O
ut
FL11
FR10
IA02
SRS
BB
Eout
R
BB
Eout
L
RIn LIn
Tone
R In
Tone
L In
RO
ut
LOut
MO
DE
1
MO
DE
2
SRS
LOG
IC
BY
PASS
(SR
S O
FF)
SRS
STER
EOSR
S M
ON
AU
RA
L
LM
OD
EM
OD
E 1
H H
L/H
MO
DE
2
L H
27 4 26 5 23 818 1723 24 15 1612 13
14 13 30 1
Out
to H
iFi L
IA07
-+3 2
1
- +
6 57
JA01
Fron
t Lef
t
Fron
t Rig
htQ
A01
QA
02
QA
03Q
A04
PAGE 07-02
V3
23
17
Au
x 3
Lef
t
Au
x 3
Rig
ht
25
78
Fro
nt C
ontr
ol P
WB
U50
1M
ain
Tu
ne
r
62
64
15
16
SIG
NA
L P
WB
Rig
ht
Ou
t
Left
Out
45
43
SE
LO
UT
DP
-17
Ch
assi
s A
ud
io (
Mai
n-T
erm
inal
) S
ign
al P
ath
TE
RM
INA
L P
WB
MO
NO
UTIX
01A
/V S
elec
t
26
27
TV
Mai
n L
TV
Mai
n R
V1
16
18
Au
x 1
Lef
t
Au
x 1
Rig
ht
V2
9 11
Au
x 2
Lef
t
Au
x 2
Rig
ht
V4
2 4
Au
x 4
Lef
t
Au
x 4
Rig
ht
V5
59
61
Au
x 5
Lef
t
Au
x 5
Rig
ht
MO
N38
40
Mo
nit
or
Ou
t L
eft
Mo
nit
or
Ou
t R
igh
t
PS
T1
10
11
8 7
PS
U1
PS
T1
SU
RR
OU
ND
PW
B(S
ee D
P17
Sur
roun
d A
udio
Circ
uit D
iagr
am)
11
10
SE
L R
SE
L L
FR
FL
JS03
HiF
i Out
HiF
i Out
IJ01
- + - +
7
Fro
nt
Audio
Out
TA
8200A
H
QJ0
1
42PR
FR
(W
O)
Out
FR
(T
W)
Out
42PL
12
FL (
WO
) O
ut
FL (
TW
) O
ut
PF
T
SIG
NA
L P
WB
1 o
f 4
PAGE 07-03
QJ0
2
See A
V M
ute
Circ
uit
Dia
gra
m
24IJ
02
- + - +
7
Cente
r A
udio
Out
TA
8200A
H
QJ0
5
2
PC
R
Cente
r R
Out
2
PC
L
12
Cente
r L O
ut
QJ0
6
PS
U2
20
Cente
r
24
JS02 4 1
Rear
R
Rear
L
Sub W
oofe
r O
ut JS
01 3 4
Optic
al I
nput
Coaxi
al I
nput
IJ03
Per
fect
Vol
1 10
3 8
7
PerV
ol O
n/O
ff
IS08
IS12
IS03
IT07
DP
-17
CH
ASS
IS S
UR
RO
UN
D A
UD
IO S
IGN
AL
PA
TH
PAGE 07-04
7 8
See Audio Signal Path (Main & Terminal)
Sel L
PSU
1
IS06
Fron
tA
udio
Con
trol
FL FR SL SR
- +5
+ -3 2
27 28
17 16FL
FRIS
07- +
6 5
+ -3 2
FL FR31 32
IS10
Fron
tG
raph
icE
Q2320
394
1110
FL
FRFR
FL
- +5
+ -3
71
23C
Cen
ter
24SW
Sub
Woo
fer
IS04
567 32
1
SW S
el 2
QS0
3,2
Out
to H
i-F
i
3230
QS1
1FR
Out
to H
i-F
iFL
QS1
3
7 1
Sel R
QW
01
IS163
512 SPFR
X
Dig
ital O
utpu
t to
DSP
2XIn
vert
Inve
rt 1
Inve
rt 2
Opt
ical
Inp
ut G
ood,
no
Inve
rt
86IT
02
67 1
11 2625
2625R
ear L
Rea
r R
PSU
2
20C
ente
r
336
36
- +3
- +5C
+ -27 3
6 1
QS1
9
QS2
0, 2
1 C
.D. B
ass
1
IS11
2
+ -5
76C
QS1
7
Sub
Woo
fer
Out
3534
IS09
31
2
SL SRSRSL
6 57
SR SL
IS15
Rea
rA
udio
Out
put
IC
4 2
7 12
4 1
JS02
Mut
e
CCSW
- +
- +
-+ -+
2JS
01
Coa
xial
Inp
utO
ptic
al I
nput
3
PW
094
3
4
Sur
roun
dS
ub P
WB
IS17 811
IS05
-
1 6 572
6SW
3
+
- +
GS D
SW S
el 1
QS0
5,6
QS0
4
QS0
1
11D
S10
V M
ute
2Q
S09
DS0
9R
ear S
pk O
ffD
S08
DS2
6DS0
7E
rror
Mut
e QS0
7
QS0
8R
ear S
pkJa
ckSe
e A
udio
(Mai
n &
Ter
min
al)
DP-1X CHASSIS
MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION
SECTION 8
Alvie W Rodgers
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
REA
R P
AN
EL fo
r the
(DP-
1X e
xcep
t DP-
17) M
OD
ELS
AU
DIO
TO
HI-F
I
RL
PAGE 08-01
AN
T A
To Con
vert
er
VID
EO
(MO
NO
)
AUD
IO
INPU
T 1
INPU
T 2
L R
S-VI
DEO
MO
NIT
OR
OU
T
AN
T B
VID
EO
(MO
NO
)
AUD
IOR
S-VI
DEO
VID
EO
(MO
NO
)
AUD
IO
L R
S-VI
DEO
Y
P BCB
P RC
R
(MO
NO
)
AUD
IO
L R
Y
P BCB
P RC
R
(MO
NO
)
AUD
IO
L R
INPU
T 4
INPU
T 5
L
REA
R P
AN
EL fo
r the
(DP-
17) M
OD
ELS
AUDI
OTO
HI-F
I
RL
PAGE 08-02
AN
T A
To Con
vert
er
VID
EO
(MO
NO
)
AUD
IO
INPU
T 1
INPU
T 2
L R
S-VI
DEO
MO
NIT
OR
OU
T
AN
T B
VID
EO
(MO
NO
)
AUD
IOR
S-VI
DEO
VID
EO
(MO
NO
)
AUD
IO
L R
S-VI
DEO
Y
P BCB
P RC
R
(MO
NO
)
AUD
IO
L R
Y
P BCB
P RC
R
(MO
NO
)
AUD
IO
L R
INPU
T 4
INPU
T 5
L
OPT
ICA
LIN
PUT
COAX
IAL
INPU
T
+ -L
+ -L
REA
R S
PEA
KER
8
ON
LY
SUB
WO
OFE
R
STO
PC
ON
NEC
T O
NLY
8 O
hm S
PEAK
ERS
DO
NO
T SH
OR
T C
IRC
UIT
SPEA
KER
TER
MIN
ALS
(suc
h da
mag
e is
NO
T C
OVE
RED
by y
our t
elev
isio
n w
arra
nty)
=
GR
EEN
or R
ED L
ED
PDC
2
PDC
1
DP3
5SW
+28V
(Gre
en)
FP03
PRO
TEC
TOR
FP01
FU
SE
DP2
3SW
-28V
(Gre
en)
Q70
1
FH01
PRO
TEC
TOR
DP-
1XD
EFLE
CTI
ON
PWB
FBT
TH01
IP01
IC P
OW
ERM
ON
ITO
R(R
ED)
IP01
DP3
7SW
+5V
(Gre
en)
DP1
1SW
+9V
(Gre
en)
PAGE 08-03
VER
TIC
ALSI
ZE
HO
RIZ
ON
TAL
SIZE
I601
HIG
HVO
LTAG
EAD
JUST
DO
NO
TAD
JUST
QH
01
SWIT
CH
ING
TRAN
SFO
RM
ER
1 3
Q77
7D
708
PSD
1
1276
PSD
2
121110
PSD
3
121110
IP04
IP05
161
5
TP91
T701
PDK1
2167
PDK3
211011
PDK4
2167
PDKP
211011
PMR
PMG
PMB R
607
R71
1
PDF1
FP02
PRO
TEC
TOR
FP07
PRO
TEC
TOR
FP04
PRO
TEC
TORFP
08PR
OTE
CTO
R
FP05
PRO
TEC
TOR
FP09
PRO
TEC
TOR
DP0
1T7
02
=
GR
EEN
or R
ED L
ED
DP-
1X S
UB
PO
WER
PW
B
D90
1
D91
2PQD2
F902
FUSE
F901
FUSE
I901
Switc
hing
Tran
sfor
mer
AUD
IOSR
S +2
9V(S
RS)
PQS1
PA
PAGE 08-04
1 9
1 6
PQD
1
6 Am
p12
5V
1 2
12
PQS2
13
2 Am
p12
5V
L905
L901
L902
T901
D91
0
R97
1
S901
S902
C90
5
C91
5I9
06
PAQ1
1 4
I902
I903
I904
R93
1
Q91
5Q
916
Q91
4Q
919
Q91
7Q
918
Q90
1
Q90
2
Q92
0
R90
2
DP-
1X S
IGN
AL
PWB
DO
UB
LE S
IDED
PAGE 08-05
PR
FLEX CONVERTER / PinP
TER
MIN
AL P
WB
SURROUND PWB
U501 MAIN TUNER
U502 PinP TUNER
2PPR
ST
7PPJ
IG
6PPF
SH
IJ01
PL
15 4117
4PPC
L61 41
PQS1
1 9 IC02
IC03
IC04
PQS2
I501
IC01
PSD1
1 7
PSD2
1 11
PSD3
1 11
PFS
19
PZV
14
PZC
18
PST1
PST2
PST3
120
120
120
PSU
1
PSU
2 120120
EAN
XC01
X552
I001 I001
MAI
N M
ICR
O
X001
QC
40Q
C35
QC
30Q
C26
I002
Q01
6
Q02
5
3D Y
/CSH
IELD
CO
VER
I301
110
0
I303
140
X301
UC
01
DP-0X CHASSIS CRT PWB
P851
P852Cathode
GREEN
E831
P801
P802Cathode
RED
BLUE
E801
PAGE 08-06
P841
PTSB
P8A2CATHODE
PVB
GND
SHORT TOKILL THE
COLOR
PRV
GND
SHORT TOKILL THE
COLOR
PGV
GND
SHORT TOKILL THE
COLOR
PTSR
E861
W801
W801
PTSG
PAGE 08-07
DP1
X C
ON
VER
GEN
CE
PWB
SER
VIC
EO
NLY
SWIT
CH
1
PDK1
2 16 7
PDK3
2 110 11
PDK4
2 16 7
PDKP
2 110 11
DIG
ITAL
CO
NVE
RG
ENC
E U
NIT
UKD
G
IK04
IK05
181
18
IK01
QK0
1
QF0
6Q
F07
PCB
PCG
PCR
PDF1
14
14
14
13
PSD
1
111
PDF2
14Q
K03
QK0
2
QK0
8Q
K07
QK0
6Q
F04 Q
F05Q
F06
IK02
QF0
8
PST1
PST2
PST3
120
120
120
111
PFT
JX01
DP-1X TERMINAL PWBDOUBLE SIDED
PAGE 08-08
QX0
3Q
X02
QX0
1
IX03
IX02
IX04 IX
05
IX09
IX06
IX07
IX08
XX01
XX02
XX03
LX03
LX01
LX02
LX04
LX06 LX
07XX05
LX08
LX10
LX09
JX02
1
4848
1
481
116116 16
DP-1X SRS (Surround) PWBDOUBLE SIDED
PAGE 08-09
PSU
1PS
U2
120
20
1
1
JA01
30
81
IA01
IA07
24
IA02
1
DP1
X C
HA
SSIS
CO
MPL
ETE
11
11 = GREEN orRED LED
PDC2
PDC1
DP35SW+28V(Green)
FP03PROTECTOR
FP01 FUSE
DP23SW-28V(Green)
Q701
FH01PROTECTOR
DP-1X
DEFLECTION
PWB FBT
TH01
IP01IC POWERMONITOR
(RED)
IP01
DP37SW+5V(Green)
DP11SW+9V(Green)
VERTICALSIZE
HORIZONTALSIZE
I601
HIGHVOLTAGE
ADJUST
DO NOTADJUST
QH01
SWITCHINGTRANSFORMER
1
3
Q777D708
IP04
IP05
1 6
1 5
TP91
T701
PDK4
PDKP
PMR
PMGPMB
R607R711
PDF1
FP02PROTECTOR
FP07PROTECTOR
FP04PROTECTOR
FP08PROTECTOR
FP05PROTECTOR
FP09PROTECTOR
DP01T702
1
PDK1 PDK3
DIGITAL CONVERGENCE UNITUKDG
IK04 IK0518118
IK01
QK01
QF06 QF07
PCBPCGPCR
PDF1
141414
1
3
PSD11 11
PDF2
1
4QK03
QK02
QK08QK07QK06
QF04
QF05
QF06
IK02
QF08
PR
FLEX CONVERTER / PinP
TER
MIN
AL P
WB
SURROUND PWB
U501 MAIN TUNER
U502 PinP TUNER
2PPR
ST
7PPJ
IG
6PPF
SH
IJ01
PL
15 41
17
4PPC
L61 41 PQS1
1 9 IC02
IC03
IC04
PQS2
I501
IC01
PSD1
PSD2
1 11PSD3
1 11
PFS
19
PZV
14
PZC
18
PST1
PST2
PST3
120
120
120
PSU
1
PSU
2
120120
EAN
XC01
X552
I001 I001
MAI
N M
ICR
OX001
QC
40
QC
35
QC
30
QC
26
I002
Q01
6
Q02
5
3D Y
/CSH
IELD
CO
VER
I301
110
0
I303
140
X301
UC
01
PSD1 111
PSD2
1 11PSD3
1 11
1 11PDKP
1
1
PDK3
7
1 7
1
7
1 7
1
PDK1
7
1 7
1
PDK4
PAGE 08-10
DC VOLTAGES Signal (1/5) Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin VoltageNo. No. DC No. No. DC
Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage 14 2.9 E 5.7No. No. DC No. No. DC I005 15 2.3 Q008 B 5.8
1 0.0 55 3.5 16 8.9 C 0.52 4.8 56 0.0 1 0.0 E 5.23 4.8 I001 57 3.4 2 4.9 Q009 B 5.24 3.8 58 3.4 3 4.1 C 0.05 3.5 59 4.6 4 4.1 E 0.06 1.6 60 4.6 5 4.7 Q010 B 0.07 3.5 61 3.5 6 0.4 C 2.98 3.3 62 1.8 7 4.7 E 5.89 2.9 63 1.8 I006 8 0.0 Q011 B 5.810 0.0 64 0.0 9 0.0 C 0.611 0.0 1 3.5 10 4.9 E 5.812 0.0 I002 2 0.0 11 0.0 Q012 B 5.213 0.0 3 3.5 12 0.0 C 0.014 0.0 1 0.0 13 5.0 E 4.615 0.0 2 0.0 14 4.8 Q013 B 5.2
16 0.0 3 0.0 15 4.7 C 8.917 0.0 I003 4 0.0 16 5.0 E 4.6
I001 18 0.0 5 4.7 1 0.0 Q014 B 5.219 0.0 6 4.7 2 0.3 C 8.920 3.5 7 0.0 3 0.4 E 3.021 0.0 8 5.1 4 1.9 Q015 B 2.4
22 0.0 1 5.1 5 0.4 C 0.023 1.8 2 0.0 6 0.4 E 2.424 2.9 I004 3 0.0 7 0.4 Q016 B 3.025 3.4 4 3.5 I007 8 0.0 C 8.926 2.2 5 0.0 9 5.0 E 0.027 2.5 6 0.0 10 0.9 Q017 B 0.828 0.6 7 0.0 11 0.0 C 029 0.0 8 0.0 12 0.0 E 3.530 0.6 9 0.0 13 0.0 Q018 B 2.831 2.5 10 0.0 14 4.7 C 3.432 1.5 11 0.0 15 4.7 E 0.033 3.5 12 0.0 16 5.0 Q019 B 0.434 2.0 13 0.0 E 0.0 C 1.935 1.7 14 0.0 Q001 B 0.0 E 0.036 1.8 15 0.0 C 3.4 Q020 B 0.437 0.0 16 5.1 E 3.5 C 1.638 0.0 17 4.9 Q002 B 3.4 E 0.039 0.0 18 0.0 C 0.0 Q021 B 0.040 0.0 19 0.0 E 0.0 C 35.141 1.6 20 5.1 Q003 B 0.8 E 35.142 1.6 1 2.6 C 0.0 Q022 B 34.943 0.0 2 2.3 E 0.0 C 0.044 0.0 3 0.0 Q004 B 0.0 E 0.045 4.7 4 0.0 C 1.9 Q023 B 0.046 4.5 5 0.0 E 0.0 C 34.947 1.9 6 0.0 Q005 B 0.0 E 3.1
48 1.9 I005 7 0.0 C 3.4 Q024 B 3.149 3.0 8 0.0 E 0.0 C 0.050 3.5 9 0.0 Q006 B -1.5 E 3.651 0.0 10 0.0 C 3.0 Q025 B 4.152 3.5 11 0.0 E 0.0 C 5.1
53 3.2 12 2.9 Q007 B 0.2 E 0.0 54 3.5 13 2.9 C 2.9 Q026 B 0.7
C 0.0 08-11
DC VOLTAGES Signal (2/5)
Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin VoltageNo. No. DC No. No. DC No. No. DC No. No. DC
1 0.0 49 0.0 97 0.0 1 4.02 0.0 50 1.6 I301 98 0.6 2 4.03 1.6 51 0.0 99 1.6 3 4.04 1.6 52 0.0 100 3.3 4 2.25 1.6 53 3.4 1 0.0 5 0.06 1.6 54 0.0 I302 2 0.0 6 1.87 1.6 55 0.0 3 0.0 7 6.08 1.6 56 0.0 4 3.3 8 3.09 1.6 57 3.3 5 3.3 9 0.010 1.1 58 0.0 1 5.0 10 7.311 2.9 59 4.6 2 2.1 11 0.012 2.5 60 4.6 3 2.1 12 5.713 1.3 61 0.0 4 1.9 13 4.814 1.3 62 0.0 5 2.1 14 0.015 1.3 63 0.0 6 5.0 15 1.016 0.0 64 3.3 7 1.8 16 0.017 2.6 65 0.0 8 1.6 17 0.618 2.6 66 0.0 9 1.6 18 8.919 1.9 67 0.0 10 0.7 19 8.920 2.1 68 0.0 11 0.0 20 4.521 0.7 69 0.0 12 0.0 I501 21 4.322 1.6 70 0.0 13 2.9 22 4.323 0.0 71 0.0 14 0.6 23 0.024 1.6 I301 72 0.0 15 0.0 24 0.025 2.1 73 0.0 16 1.6 25 5.826 0.0 74 0.0 17 1.6 26 0.0
I301 27 0.0 75 0.0 18 1.6 27 0.028 0.0 76 0.0 19 1.6 28 0.029 0.0 77 0.0 I303 20 5.0 29 0.0
30 0.0 78 0.0 21 0.0 30 0.031 1.6 79 0.0 22 1.6 31 5.532 3.3 80 0.0 23 1.6 32 0.033 0.0 81 3.3 24 1.6 33 0.034 0.0 82 0.0 25 1.6 34 4.635 0.0 83 0.0 26 1.6 35 0.036 0.0 84 0.0 27 2.5 36 0.037 0.0 85 1.1 28 1.1 37 2.238 0.0 86 0.0 29 1.1 38 2.839 0.0 87 0.0 30 0.0 39 0.040 0.0 88 1.2 21 1.3 40 0.041 0.0 89 0.9 32 3.0 41 5.042 0.0 90 1.1 33 1.9 42 5.043 0.0 91 1.6 34 2.1 43 0.044 0.0 92 3.3 35 0.0 44 3.145 3.3 93 0.0 36 2.5 45 0.046 3.3 94 0.0 37 1.9 46 3.847 1.9 95 3.3 38 2.1 47 2.348 0.0 96 0.0 39 2.1 48 2.5
40 0.0
08-12
DC VOLTAGES Signal (3/5)
Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin VoltageNo. No. DC No. Name DC No. Name DC No. Name DC
1 2.5 E 0.0 E 0.0 E 0.02 0.0 Q305 B 0.0 Q501 B 0.8 Q559 B 0.73 1.8 C 1.7 C 0.0 C 0.04 0.0 E 0.0 E 0.0 E 5.25 1.8 Q306 B 0.0 Q504 B 0 Q560 B 5.06 1.8 C 0.0 C 4.9 C 8.97 0.0 E 3.0 E 1.6 E 4.1
I502 8 2.4 Q307 B 3.6 Q505 B 2.2 Q561 B 3.59 2.8 C 8.9 C 0.0 C 0.0
10 0.0 E 2.5 E 4.9 E 5.211 2.5 Q308 B 1.9 Q551 B 4.3 Q562 B 5.012 0.0 C 0.0 C 0.0 C 8.9
13 5.0 E 0.0 E 4.9 E 4.214 2.5 Q309 B 0.4 Q552 B 4.3 Q563 B 3.615 0.0 C 0.0 C 0.0 C 0.016 2.5 E 0.0 E 5.1 E 2.31 0.0 Q310 B 0.4 Q553 B 4.5 Q564 B 1.72 0.2 C 1.6 C 0 C 0.03 5.0 E 1.7 E 4.84 4.7 Q311 B 1.6 Q554 B 05 0.0 C 1.2 C 8.96 0.0 E 1.1 E 3.37 0.0 Q312 B 1.2 Q555 B 0.0
I503 8 0.0 C 1.7 C 8.99 0.0 E 0.0 E 010 4.9 Q313 B 0.0 Q556 B 011 4.9 C 0.0 C 8.912 5.0 E 1.2 E 3.213 0.3 Q314 B 1.8 Q557 B 3.814 0.0 C 8.3 C 0.015 4.7 E 8.9 E 1.2
16 5.0 Q315 B 8.3 Q558 B 1.8E 2.0 C 5.2 C 8.9
Q301 B 2.3 E 4.6C 3.1 Q316 B 0.0E 3.3 C 8.9
Q302 B 3.1 E 2.7C 0.0 Q317 B 2.1E 0.0 C 0.0
Q303 B 0.0C 2.8E 0.4
Q304 B 0.0C 0.0
08-13
DC VOLTAGES Signal (4/5)
Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin VoltageNo. No. DC No. No. DC No. Name DC No. Name DC
1 1.6 51 0.0 E 0.4 E 0.72 5.5 52 0.0 QC10 B 0.0 QC24 B 0.03 5.3 IC01 53 5.8 C 9.2 C 0.04 5.2 54 4.2 E 9.2 E 3.5
5 5.1 55 9.2 QC11 B 9.2 QC26 B 4.26 0.0 56 5.6 C 1.0 C 9.37 0.2 IC02 1 7.2 E 0.0 E 3.38 5.2 2 0.0 QC12 B 0.0 QC30 B 2.69 5.2 3 5.0 C 1.8 C 0.010 5.2 1 4.2 E 1.6 E 8.0
11 7.1 IC03 2 0.0 QC13 B 0.0 QC31 B 0.012 3.3 3 3.4 C 0.0 C 3.313 4.8 1 5.0 E 1.2 E 3.314 2.1 IC04 2 0.0 QC14 B 0.0 QC35 B 2.615 3.3 3 2.5 C 9.2 C 0.016 3.3 E 0.0 E 1.2 E 8.0
IC01 17 1.6 QC01 B 0.6 QC15 B 0.6 QC36 B 0.018 1.6 C 1.7 C 9.2 C 0.019 9.2 E 0.5 E 0.0 E 3.420 6.7 QC02 B 0.6 QC16 B 0.0 QC40 B 2.721 5.5 C 1.7 C 9.2 C 0.022 2.9 E 0.5 E 0.0 E 0.023 2.6 QC03 B 0.6 QC17 B 0.0 QC41 B 7.324 1.2 C 0.0 C 9.2 C 3.425 0.0 E 3.5 E 6.9 E 0.026 1.4 QC04 B 4.1 QC18 B 7.5 QC42 B 0.427 5.1 C 9.2 C 9.2 C 0.028 0.2 E 3.4 E 0.729 2.2 QC05 B 4.0 QC19 B 0.030 4.6 C 9.2 C 0.031 4.6 E 3.5 E 0.732 0.0 QC06 B 4.1 QC20 B 0.033 4.1 C 0.0 C 0.034 4.1 E 1.1 E 0.735 4.1 QC07 B 1.2 QC21 B 0.036 0.6 C 1.8 C 0.037 4.1 E 0.0 E 0.738 4.1 QC08 B 1.2 QC22 B 0.039 4.1 C 0.0 C 0.040 9.2 E 1.1 E 0.741 2.7 QC09 B 1.1 QC23 B 0.042 2.7 C 1.8 C 0.043 2.744 0.045 9.246 4.947 4.948 4.7
49 0.050 0.0
08-14
DC VOLTAGES
Signal (5/5) Deflection Power Deflection
Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin VoltageNo. Name DC No. No. DC No. Name DC No. Name DC
1 1.6 1 14.3 E 0.0 1 2.02 0.0 2 26.6 Q601 B 0.3 IP01 2 0.03 0.0 3 4.9 C 4.2 3 161.34 0.0 4 6.7 E 0.0 4 15.45 1.6 I601 5 4.5 Q602 B 0.0 5 0.0
IJ01 6 10.8 6 0.0 C 0.5 IP02 1 12.07 14.8 7 5.3 E 0.0 2 11.18 5.1 8 6.1 Q603 B 0.0 3 3.09 31.7 9 4.5 C 5.2 4 15.410 0.0 10 27.0 E 27.2 IP03 1 115.611 4.3 11 1.0 Q604 B 27.0 2 11.0
12 14.4 1 5.2 C 0.0 3 0.02 11.6 E 92.1 1 11.7
Circuit Pin Voltage 3 0.8 Q701 B 93.1 IP04 2 9.1No. Name DC 4 2.5 C 115.5 3 0.0
E 0.0 5 1.7 E 2.3 4 1.9QJ01 B 0.0 6 0.0 Q703 B 3.0 1 7.4
C 0.0 7 0.9 C 93.1 IP05 2 5.1E 0.0 IH01 8 0.0 E 0.0 3 0.0
QJ02 B 0.0 9 7.1 Q704 B 0.5 4 1.9C 0.0 10 7.1 C 14.1 1 7.4E 0.0 11 7.1 E 0.0 IP06 2 6.3
QJ03 B 0.0 12 7.1 Q705 B 0.7 3 0.0C 4.2 13 2.5 C 0.0 4 2.1E 0.0 14 1.9 E 1.3
QJ04 B 0.0 15 5.0 Q706 B 0.8C 10.8 16 0.0 C 11.6 Circuit Pin Voltage
E 0.0 No. Name DCQ707 B 0.7 E 116.0
Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage C 0.0 QP02 B 115.5No. No. DC No. No. DC E 0.0 C 1.3
E 0.4 E 0.0 Q708 B 0.0 E 9.1QH01 B 3.8 QN01 B 0.0 C 11.1 QP03 B 9.1
C 90.0 C 0.5 E 0.0 C 0.0E 0.0 E 11.4 Q709 B 0.4
QH02 B 0.5 QN02 B 11.4 C 11.1C 3.8 C 0.0 E 0.0E 0.0 E 0.0 Q710 B 0.3
QH03 B 0.5 QN03 B 0.0 C 0.0C 59.1 C 11.4 E 0.0
E 0.5 Q777 B 0.0QN04 B 0.9 C 90.0
C 11.4E 0.0
QN05 B 0.0C 11.5E 0.0
QN06 B 0.4C 0.0
08-15
DC VOLTAGES
SRS/BBE VM FOCUS
Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin VoltageNo. No. DC No. No. DC No. Name DC No. Name DC
1 4.5 20 4.5 E 2.6 E 0.62 4.5 21 4.5 QE01 B 3.3 QF03 B 1.23 4.5 IA02 22 4.5 C 12.5 C 5.74 4.5 23 4.5 E 12.5 E 5.6
IA01 5 4.5 24 4.5 QE02 B 11.8 QF04 B 5.76 4.5 1 4.9 C 27.4 C 0.77 4.5 2 4.9 E 12.5 E 0.38 4.5 3 4.9 QE03 B 13.1 QF05 B 0.79 0.8 4 0.0 C 22.1 C 11.210 4.5 IA07 5 4.8 E 21.4 E 11.411 1.2 6 4.8 QE04 B 22.1 QF06 B 11.612 1.2 7 4.8 C 27.4 C 302.013 4.5 8 8.9 E 1.6 E 401.014 4.5 QE05 B 2.2 QF07 B 301.015 0.0 Circuit Pin Voltage C 15.3 C 788.016 8.9 No. Name DC E 16.0 E 10.217 0.0 E 1.4 E07 B 15.4 QF08 B 10.718 4.8 QA01 B 2.1 C 0.0 C 354.019 1.4 C 8.2 E 15.4
20 1.4 E 8.9 QE08 B 16.021 4.5 QA02 B 8.2 C 27.422 4.5 C 5.0 E 14.823 4.5 E 1.4 QE10 B 14.424 4.5 QA03 B 2.1 C 27.4
25 4.5 C 8.2 E 14.626 4.5 E 8.9 QE11 B 14.027 4.5 QA04 B 8.2 C 0.0
28 4.5 C 4.9 E 214.529 4.5 E 0.0 QE22 B 214.030 4.5 QA05 B 0.0 C 10.61 0.0 C 0.0 E 213.42 4.5 QE23 B 213.0
3 4.5 C 121.64 4.5 E 121.65 4.5 QE24 B 134.1
6 4.5 C 116.47 4.5 E 16.68 4.5 QE25 B 17.19 4.5 C 116.0
IA02 10 8.9 E 0.911 0.0 QE26 B 1.512 4.5 C 16.613 0.0 E 11.814 0.0 QE35 B 12.315 4.5 C 155.016 4.5 E 11.817 4.5 QE36 B 12.518 4.5 C 27.419 0.0
08-16
DC VOLTAGES
Power supply Convergence Sensor
Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin VoltageNo. No. DC No. No. DC No. No. DC No. No. DC
1 163.9 IK01 1 11.6 E -7.1 E 5.1I901 2 0.0 2 0.0 QK01 B -6.5 QL10 B 4.7
3 0.0 3 5.1 C -5.3 C 0 4 16.9 IK02 1 4.0 E 0.6 E 5.2
5 2.4 2 5.0 QK02 B 0.0 QL11 B 4.71 5.2 3 0.0 C 0.0 C 1.62 4.3 1 0.0 E 0.6 E 5.1
I902 3 3.5 2 0.0 QK03 B 0 QL16 B 4.74 17.5 3 -29.3 C -5.8 C 0.01 5.0 4 -30.4 E 0 E 0.5
I903 2 4.3 5 31.0 QK06 B 0 QL17 B 4.73 0.0 6 0.0 C 5.1 C 0.04 16.8 7 0.0 E 01 4.8 8 -26.9 QK07 B 0
I904 2 5.5 9 0.0 C 5.13 5.2 IK04 10 27.2 E 0.0
4 2.4 11 0.0 QK08 B 0.01 0.0 12 -26.9 C 5.1
I906 2 1.9 13 0.0 3 9.5 14 0.0
4 9.1 15 0.05 11.0 16 0.0
17 -26.918 0.01 0.02 0.03 -29.34 -30.45 31.06 0.07 0.08 -26.99 0.0
IK05 10 27.211 0.012 -26.913 0.014 0.015 0.016 0.017 -26.918 0.0
08-17
DC VOLTAGES Terminal (1 of 2)
Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin VoltageNo. No. DC No. No. DC No. No. DC No. No. DC
1 3.9 49 4.7 28 0.0 28 4.92 4.4 50 4.4 29 5.5 29 0.03 4.0 51 4.4 30 5.5 30 4.6
4 4.4 52 4.4 31 5.5 31 4.65 4.4 53 4.2 32 0.6 32 0.06 8.3 54 4.4 33 4.4 33 2.8
7 0.0 55 3.6 34 4.5 34 2.8IX01 8 3.9 IX01 56 4.0 IX03 35 0.0 35 2.8
9 4.4 57 0.0 36 0.0 IX04 36 1.110 3.9 58 4.3 37 2.2 37 1.211 4.4 59 4.4 38 0.0 38 2.212 4.4 60 3.9 39 0.0 39 2.413 0.0 61 4.4 40 2.7 40 4.914 4.8 62 4.4 41 4.9 41 2.815 3.9 63 4.2 42 4.9 42 2.816 4.4 64 4.4 43 0.0 43 2.817 3.9 1 6.3 44 3.1 44 1.118 4.4 2 0.0 45 0.0 45 1.119 4.4 IX02 3 3.8 46 3.7 46 0.0
20 0.0 4 4.9 47 2.3 47 2.421 4.8 5 8.7 48 2.2 48 0.022 4.4 1 4.0 1 2.8 1 2.8
23 4.4 2 4.0 2 2.8 2 2.824 3.9 3 4.0 3 2.8 3 2.825 4.4 4 2.2 4 1.0 4 1.026 4.4 5 0.0 5 1.0 5 1.027 0.0 6 1.8 6 0.0 6 0.028 4.8 7 5.9 7 2.8 7 2.829 4.4 8 2.9 8 2.8 8 2.830 4.4 IX03 9 0.0 IX04 9 2.8 IX05 9 2.831 4.4 10 7.2 10 1.1 10 1.132 0.0 11 0.0 11 1.1 11 1.133 4.7 12 5.6 12 4.9 12 4.934 4.7 13 4.7 13 3.4 13 3.435 0.0 14 0.0 14 3.4 14 3.436 0.0 15 1.0 15 3.2 15 3.237 4.4 16 0.0 16 3.0 16 3.038 4.4 17 0.6 17 0.0 17 0.039 3.5 18 8.7 18 1.1 18 1.140 4.4 19 8.7 19 0.0 19 0.041 4.2 20 4.4 20 2.9 20 2.942 8.8 21 4.4 21 0.0 21 0.043 4.4 22 4.2 22 0.0 22 0.044 4.2 23 8.7 23 0.0 23 0.045 4.4 24 0.0 24 0.0 24 0.046 3.5 25 5.7 25 2.5 25 2.547 4.4 26 5.7 26 2.5 26 2.548 0.0 27 5.5 27 2.3 27 2.3
08-18
DC VOLTAGES Terminal (2 of 2)
Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin VoltageNo. No. DC No. No. DC No. No. DC No. Name DC
28 4.9 12 0.0 E 3.5 E 5.029 0.0 13 0.0 QX01 B 4.2 QX13 B 4.430 4.6 IX07 14 0.0 C 8.8 C 0.031 4.6 15 0.0 E 2.9 E 4.832 4.9 16 5.0 QX02 B 3.5 QX14 B 4.333 2.8 1 0.0 C 8.8 C 0.034 2.8 2 5.0 E 3.7 E 4.835 2.8 3 4.7 QX03 B 4.3 QX15 B 4.2
IX05 36 1.1 4 0.0 C 8.8 C 0.037 1.2 5 4.8 E 3.6 E 2.638 2.2 IX08 6 0.0 QX04 B 4.2 QX16 B 3.239 2.4 7 0.0 C 8.8 C 4.940 4.9 8 5.0 E 3.5 E 2.541 2.8 9 0.0 QX05 B 4.2 QX17 B 3.242 2.8 10 4.8 C 8.8 C 4.943 2.8 11 0.0 E 3.7 E 2.944 1.1 12 0.0 QX06 B 4.4 QX18 B 2.345 1.1 13 0.0 C 8.8 C 0.046 0.0 14 5.0 E 3.6 E 3.247 2.4 1 0.0 QX07 B 4.2 QX19 B 2.648 0.0 2 5.0 C 8.8 C 0.01 0.0 3 5.0 E 4.9 E 3.22 0.0 4 5.0 QX08 B 4.3 QX20 B 2.53 0.0 5 0.6 C 0.0 C 0.04 0.0 6 0.0 E 4.6 E 2.95 0.0 7 4.6 QX09 B 4.0 QX21 B 2.36 0.0 8 0.0 C 0.0 C 0.0
IX06 7 0.0 IX09 9 0.0 E 5.0 E 3.28 0.0 10 0.0 QX10 B 5.6 QX22 B 2.69 0.0 11 5.0 C 8.8 C 0.010 0.0 12 4.4 E 6.0 E 3.211 0.0 13 0.0 QX11 B 6.6 QX23 B 2.512 0.0 14 0.0 C 8.8 C 0.013 0.0 15 0.0 E 6.2 E 5.214 0.0 16 5.0 QX12 B 6.8 QX24 B 4.615 0.0 C 8.8 C 0.016 5.0 E 0.51 0.0 QX36 B 1.12 0.0 C 9.23 0.0 E 0.04 0.0 QX37 B 0.65 0.0 C 5.5
IX07 6 0.0 E 0.07 0.0 QX40 B 0.08 0.0 C 0.09 0.0 E 0.010 0.0 QX41 B 0.011 0.0 C 0.0
08-19
DC VOLTAGES
CPT CPT Power Supply Control
Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin Voltage Circuit Pin VoltageNo. Name DC No. Name DC No. Name DC No. Name DC
E 3.0 E 8.6 E 16.9 E 0.0Q801 B 3.5 Q853 B 9.1 Q901 B 16.9 QM01 B 0.8
C 8.3 C 156.4 C 0.0 C 0.0E 8.3 E 157.0 E 0.0 E 1.8
Q802 B 8.6 Q854 B 156.0 Q902 B 0.0 QM03 B 2.5C 0.0 C 1.1 C 16.9 C 9.0E 8.6 E 157.0 E 0.0 E 1.9
Q803 B 9.1 Q855 B 157.0 Q914 B 0.9 QM04 B 2.5C 168.0 C 224.9 C 0.5 C 8.9E 169.0 E 2.5 E 1.9 E 0.0
Q804 B 168.4 Q858 B 1.8 Q915 B 1.9 QM05 B 0.0C 1.1 C 0.0 C 0.1 C 5.2E 169.0 E 1.8 E 0.0
Q805 B 170.0 Q859 B 2.5 Q916 B 0.1C 225.0 C 9.1 C 1.9E 1.0 E 1.1 E 2.2
Q812 B 1.7 Q862 B 1.8 Q917 B 2.5C 1.1 C 1.1 C 5.2E 3.1 E 3.2 E 0.0
Q851 B 3.5 Q8A1 B 3.8 Q918 B 0.0C 8.3 C 8.3 C 4.3E 8.3 E 8.2 E 2.2
Q852 B 8.6 Q8A2 B 8.6 Q919 B 2.2C 9.1 C 9.1 C 0.1
E 8.6 E 2.9Q8A3 B 9.1 Q920 B 3.5
C 150.0 C 17.5E 151.6
Q8A4 B 150.8C 1.1E 152.0
Q8A5 B 152.0C 224.0E 3.0
Q8A6 B 3.0C 0.0E 3.0
Q8A7 B 3.7C 9.1E 0.0
Q8C1 B 0.0C 9.0E 1.1
Q8C2 B 0.0C 1.1
08-20
DP-1X OVERLAY PART NUMBERS
PAGE 08-21
Below is the jig screen part number for the 2H models. 2001 Models HITACHI MODELS: H312251 43” 4x3 Full Mode H312252 43” 4x3 V Squeeze Mode H312253 53” 4x3 Full Mode H312254 53” 4x3 V Squeeze Mode H312255 61” 4x3 Full Mode H312256 61” 4x3 V Squeeze Mode H312259 43” 16x9 H312257 53” 16x9 H312258 61” 16x9 PHILIPS MODELS: H312261 60” Phillips 4x3 Full Mode H312262 60” Phillips 4x3 V Squeeze Mode H312263 55” Phillips 4x3 Full Mode H312264 55” Philips 4x3 V Squeeze Mode ZENITH MODELS: H312265 56” Zenith 16x9 H312266 65” Zenith 16x9
DP-1X CHASSIS
SERVICE BULLETINS AND OTHER
INFORMATION
SECTION 9
Alvie W Rodgers
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
MODEL: 43FDX01B, 53FDX01B 53SDX01B, 61SDX01B 53SWX01W, 61SWX01W SUBJECT: CLARIFICATION OF MEMORY INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE When servicing any of the above mentioned models, the service technician should be cautioned that the standard technique of blindly re-initializing the memory whenever a problem is presented could possibly cause additional labor in order to bring the set back to it’s original settings. Be sure to note the values for sub brightness (SUB BRT) and horizontal centering (H-POSI) before proceeding with a complete memory initialization, as the values that will show up after performing memory initialization may not be correct. Uncorrected or misadjusted SUB BRT will result in either a darker or lighter picture than before. (And the customer will notice!) Uncorrected or misadjusted H POSI will result in a shadow or fold-over on either side of the screen. Do not attempt to make corrections via Digital Convergence correction; instead, input the correct values for these settings. When an initialization of memory is needed, there are two methods: electronic (preferred) and mechanical.
Electronic Memory Initialization (Service Adjust Mode)
1. The set should be off, but plugged in to AC. 2. Press and hold the INPUT button on the front panel. 3. Press the POWER button on the front panel. 4. Release both buttons. 5. The Service Adjust Mode menu should appear on screen. (See Figure 1). Before proceeding to
MEMORY INITIAL, it is highly recommended to note the existing setting for Sub Brightness as well as the existing settings for Horizontal Centering in both progressive and high definition modes.
6. Select SUB BRT using the ! or " buttons on the remote, then press the #cursor key on the remote. The screen will darken considerably and SUB BRT with its associated value will appear on screen. Note the existing value. To adjust, press cursor $ or #. To exit from SUB BRT adjustment, press cursor ! or ". In case the memory was initialized prior to acquisition of the existing data value, refer to the service manual in order to correctly adjust the SUB BRT.
PTV Page 1 of 2
March, 2001
Hitachi America, Ltd., Home Electronics Division National Service
Page 09-01
ADJUST MODE
SUB BRT !" Brings up sub brightness adjust (cursor #)
SERVICE ! Collapses vertical for setting color temp
DEF RESET ! Select when replace DEF PWB
V/P RESET ! Select when replace SIG PWB
3DYC RESET ! Select when replace 3DYC comb filter
FLEX RESET ! Select when replace FLEX CONVERTER
DSP RESET ! Select when replace DSP module
CCD RESET ! Select whenever closed caption fails to track
FACTORY RESET ! Resets all customer settings
MEMORY INITIAL ! Resets all of the above (ONLY DO IF NECESSARY*)
Figure 1 - Service Menu Page 1
Alvie W Rodgers
(continued)
Page 2 7. To access the horizontal centering adjustment for progressive, display NTSC (or 480i), then go to service menu page 2 (Figure 2)
by either pressing the MENU button once, or using the "cursor key on the remote to scroll down through service menu page 1. The first menu selection on service menu page 2 is H POSI. Note the existing value. Also note that the setting for TA1300 is 315 (31.5 KHz). In case the memory was initialized prior to acquisition of the existing data value, refer to the service manual in order to correctly set up the H POSI for progressive.
8. To access the horizontal centering adjustment for high definition, display 1080i, then go to service menu page 2 (Figure 3) by either pressing the MENU button once, or using the "cursor key on the remote to scroll down through service menu page 1. The first menu selection on service menu page 2 is H POSI. Note the existing value. Also note that the setting for TA1300 is 3375 (33.75 KHz). In case the memory was initialized prior to acquisition of the existing data value, refer to the service manual in order to correctly set up the H POSI for high definition.
9. After the existing values for SUB BRT and H POSI have been noted, proceed to MEMORY INITIAL by using the ! or " buttons on the remote to navigate to service menu page 1, then press the #cursor key on the remote to initialize the memory.
10. Re-enter recorded data values, if known, for (1) SUB BRT and (2) H POSI in both progressive and high definition modes. 11. To exit from Service Adjust Mode, press the INPUT button on the front panel.
Mechanical Memory Initialization (PERFORM ONLY WHEN NECESSARY*) 1. Disconnect power to the set. 2. Remove the back cover. 3. Remove the two screws holding the chassis to the cabinet, if necessary. 4. Disconnect wiring harness clips to free up the chassis, if necessary. 5. Reconnect power to the television and turn the set on. 6. If possible, go into service adjust mode (as previously described) and note
settings for SUB BRT and H POSI. 7. Locate PP1 and place a jumper across pins 1 and 2. See Figure 4. 8. Hold jumper in place for approximately five seconds. (There will not be an
audible tone). 9. Remove the jumper. 10. Confirm EEPROM reset. Input source is now set to AIR, and not CABLE 1 or
2, no CHILD LOCK, and only channels 2-13 are in memory. 11. If step 6 was performed, re-enter settings for SUB BRT and H POSI. 12. If step 6 was not performed, adjust both SUB BRT and H POSI in accordance
with the applicable service manual. 13. Re-assemble chassis and re-install PTV back cover. Set is now ready for
operation.
* Definition of Necessary Perform Mechanical Memory Initialization only if I001 (main micro) or I002 (EEPROM) have been replaced and there is no visible display.
I001Microprocessor
7 20
KEY-IN 1 CLOCK
1 2 PP13.3V
JUMPER
R1E4D024
R100
Figure 4 - Schematic Location of Connector PP1
PTV 01-01 (page 2)
ADJUST MODE
TA1300 315
H POSI 32
FLEX CONT
47 VD-POS 3F
UPD64081
DYGA 09
DCGA 06
VAPGA 05
VAPIN 0B
YHCOR 00
Figure 2 - Service Menu Page 2 (NTSC) Figure 3 - Service Menu Page 2 (1080i)
ADJUST MODE
TA1300 3375
H POSI 2B
FLEX CONT
47 VD-POS 3F
UPD64081
DYGA 09
DCGA 06
VAPGA 05
VAPIN 0B
YHCOR 00
31.5 KHz 33.75 KHz
Alvie W Rodgers
Page 09-02
MODEL: 43FDX01B, 53FDX01B 53SDX01B, 61SDX01B 53SWX01W, 61SWX01W
SUBJECT: HORIZONTAL NOISE PRESENT WHEN COLD
Phenomenon: There have been reports from the field of isolated cases involving the above mentioned models that may experience a kind of horizontal noise symptom when operated from a cold start. (See Figures 1 and 2). This symptom will gradually decay as it warms up, until it is no longer noticeable. This problem can be attributed to the anode cap connector. The anode cap connector may not be firmly secured to the PRT, thus causing interference noise due to high voltage arcing and leakage. A new and improved anode cap connector utilizes a tension mechanism, in the form of a silicone rubber insert. (See Figures 3 and 4).
Countermeasure: To identify which PRT has a problem, wait until the arcing has stopped, then carefully wiggle the anode connector wire with a wooden stick. BE CAREFUL NOT TO WIGGLE THE ANODE CONNECTOR WIRE TOO HARD. When the defective PRT has been located, replace the entire anode cap connector and wire using Hitachi part number EZ01322.
Procedure: 1. Turn off the PTV. 2. Remove back of PTV and disconnect all cables going to the suspect PRT. 3. Remove screen frame assembly. 4. Remove the PRT assembly. 5. Remove the HV anode lead and cup from the PRT. 6. Ensure that HV anode cup location is completely cleaned of all old silicon sealant residue. 7. Install new and improved HV anode lead. Place a 3/8” bead of silicon sealant (Hitachi part
number 9413926) on the CRT around the lip of the HV anode. NOTE: Do not allow sealant to contact any metal connector parts.
8. Re-assemble PTV and adjust if necessary.
PTV Page 1 of 1
July, 2001
Hitachi America, Ltd., Home Electronics Division National Service
Figure 1 NTSC Color Bars
Figure 2 NTSC Color Bars with horizontal noise
Figure 3 Old Cap - No silicone rubber insert
Figure 4 New Cap - silicone rubber insert added
ANODE CAP ANODE CAP
Alvie W Rodgers
Page 09-03
MODEL: 50DX10B, 60DX10B HP11 CHASSIS 43GX10B, 50GX30B HP12 CHASSIS 53SBX10B, 61SBX10B HP13 CHASSIS SUBJECT: CUSTOMER COMPLAINT OF EXCESSIVE NOISE IN PINP Details: Reportedly, some customers may complain about noise in the sub-picture. This symptom can only manifest under two coexisting conditions, (i.e. both conditions must be met). (1) Only when using a source of composite video. (2) Only with certain brand name DVD or VCR as a source for Picture-In-Picture. If this complaint is received, perform the following circuit improvement. Procedure: 1. Replace RG46 (0.0 ohm chip resistor jumper) with 1.0K ohm chip resistor (p/n 0700041). 2. Replace RG47 (0.0 ohm chip resistor jumper) with 270 ohm chip resistor (p/n 0700033M). 3. Add C1 100pf capacitor (p/n 0890074) as per Figure 1. 4. Add C2 100pf capacitor (p/n 0890074) as per Figure 1. 5. Add L1 100uh coil (p/n 2122956M) as per Figure 1. The above mentioned parts can be obtained by ordering parts kit X480231.
PTV Page 1 of 1
August, 2001
Hitachi America, Ltd., Home Electronics Division National Service
10
1
RG
47
RG46 C1 C2
L1
101
Figure 1
Alvie W Rodgers
Page 09-04
MODEL CHASSIS MODEL CHASSIS MODEL CHASSIS 43UWX10B DP14G 43FDX01B DP05F 50DX10B HP11 53UWX10B DP14G 53FDX01B DP05 60DX10B HP11 61UWX10B DP14G 53SDX01B DP06 43GX10B HP12
61SDX01B DP06 50GX30B HP12 53SWX01W DP07 53SBX10B HP13
53UDX10B DP15 61SWX01W DP07 61SBX10B HP13 61UDX10B DP15 53SWX10B DP17 53SWX12B DP17 61SWX10B DP17 61SWX12B DP17 SUBJECT: DIGITAL CONVERGENCE ADJUSTMENT MODE ACCESS Details: In the past, when the technician needed to enter the Digital Convergence Adjustment Mode (DCAM), it was necessary to open the front of the unit to access the service switch. Now, to access the DCAM without removing the front panel, please follow the below instructions. Procedure for Chassis DP14G, DP15, DP17: 1. Press the MAGIC FOCUS button on front panel. 2. While Magic Focus is running, press MAGIC FOCUS button again to “stop”. 3. When “STOP” is displayed in OSD, press RECALL or STATUS button on remote control. 4. The unit will now be in the DCAM. Procedure for Chassis DP06, DP07, HP13: 1. Press and hold the MAGIC FOCUS button on front panel. 2. While the button is held down, the OSD will change from “MAGIC FOCUS” to “CENTER
MODE”, then to “STATIC MODE”. 3. When “STATIC MODE” is displayed in OSD, press INPUT or ANT button on remote control. 4. The unit will now be in the DCAM. Procedure for Chassis DP05F, DP05, HP11, HP12: 1. Press and hold the DIGITAL ARRAY or CONVERGENCE ADJUST button on front panel. 2. While the button is held down, then press the INPUT or ANT button on remote control. 3. The unit will now be in the DCAM. NOTE: 1. Proceed with digital convergence adjustment. Remember to save/initialize the correction data. 2. To exit, press POWER button on the front panel.
PTV Page 1 of 1
August, 2001
Hitachi America, Ltd., Home Electronics Division National Service
Alvie W Rodgers
Page 09-05
Alvie W Rodgers
NOTE: DP-15E (43FDX10B and 43FDX11B) can not enter DCAM via remote.
MODEL CHASSIS 43FDX01B DP05F 53FDX01B, 53FDX01BA DP05 53SDX01B, 61SDX01B DP06 53SWX01W, 61SWX01W DP07 SUBJECT: INTERMITTENT BLACK HORIZONTAL BARS Details: We have received isolated field reports with a symptom of highly intermittent black horizontal bars appearing in the picture. If the unit is removed from the customers location, the symptom more than likely will not show up. The cause of this phenomenon results from low AC. These models are designed to operate normally when using 120VAC ±10% (108VAC - 132VAC). The symptom will occur when AC drops below 90VAC. Countermeasure: (NOTE - Only perform this countermeasure for specific customer complaint) Procedure: 1. Change value of capacitor C009 from 10uF/16V to 22uf/16V. Use locally
procured part for new capacitor (22uf/16V). C009 is located on the SIGNAL PWB near the IC01 heat sink and the PR connector.
2. Verify the effectiveness of this countermeasure by dropping AC to less than 90VAC using a variable AC isolation transformer. Symptom may still manifest at lower than 80VAC.
PTV Page 1 of 1
August, 2001
Hitachi America, Ltd., Home Electronics Division National Service
Alvie W Rodgers
Page 09-06
MODEL: ALL PTV WITH ULTRA-SHIELD PROTECTOR SUBJECT: REMOVAL OF PROTECTIVE PLASTIC SHEET DETAILS: It has been discovered that on some TV sets with screen protectors, the plastic sheet leaves a film or a glue residue after it’s removal. To remove the glue residue from the screen protector, please follow the approved method listed below.
CORRECTION: 1. Remove the screen protector sheet. 2. Use the cleaner *EndustTM for Electronics (see Figure 1) and spray over area with
glue residue on the screen. 3. Clean with a soft towel after application. 4. Observe that the glue residue has been removed.
If the glue residue persists:
1. Use **Lava® Heavy-Duty Hand Cleaner Towels (see Figure 2) to remove glue residue.
2. Observe that the glue residue has been removed. 3. Clean off the soap film left by the **Lava® Heavy-Duty Hand Cleaner Towels
using any generic type window cleaning solution. PARTS: * EndustTM for Electronics ©1996 KIWI BRANDS DOUGLASSVILLE, PA 19518-1239
**Lava® Heavy-Duty Hand Cleaner Towels WD-40 Company San Diego, CA 92110
PTV Page 1 of 1
September, 2001
Hitachi America, Ltd., Home Electronics Division National Service
Figure 1 Figure 2
Alvie W Rodgers
Page 09-07
MODEL: 43UWX10B DP-14G CHASSIS 53UWX10B, 53UWX10BA DP-14G CHASSIS 61UWX10B, 61UWX10BA DP-14G CHASSIS 53UDX10B, 53UDX10BA DP-15 CHASSIS 61UDX10B DP-15 CHASSIS 53SBX10B HP-13 CHASSIS SUBJECT: MAGIC FOCUS METHOD DETAILS: Some of the new 2001 Projection TV models are using ‘Magic-S’ convergence technology instead of the prior single cross-hatch technology. This new ‘Magic-S’ technology uses four sensors instead of eight. When the MAGIC FOCUS button on the front panel is pressed, the television will automatically adjust itself to the factory adjusted data. NOTE: BEFORE INITIATING MAGIC FOCUS, THE TELEVISION MUST BE TURNED “ON” AND HEAT RUN FOR A MINIMUM OF 20 MINUTES. IF THE MAGIC FOCUS BUTTON IS PRESSED BEFORE THE WARM-UP PERIOD IS COMPLET, THE CONVERGENCE RESULTS MAY BE ABNORMAL. To correct abnormal convergence, turn off the television and allow for cool down, approximately 30 seconds. Turn on the television again, and allow for minimum of 20 minutes for warm up. If after pressing MAGIC FOCUS button still returns abnormal convergence, follow the below procedure to access the Digital Convergence Adjustment Mode (DCAM), then first attempt to correct by reading old ROM data into memory. If this fails, proceed with digital convergence adjustments. PROCEDURE FOR DP14G AND DP15 CHASSIS: 1. Press the MAGIC FOCUS button on front panel. 2. While Magic Focus is running, press the MAGIC FOCUS button again to
“STOP”. 3. When “STOP” is displayed on the OSD, press the RECALL or the STATUS
button on the remote control. 4. The unit will now be in the DCAM. 5. Press the SWAP button twice to read old ROM data into memory. “READ
FROM ROM?” will display on the OSD after the first press of the SWAP button.
6. Proceed with digital convergence adjustments ONLY if READ FROM ROM did not clear up the convergence error.
7. Remember to save the correction data and initialize the MAGIC FOCUS sensors. To save the correction data, press the PIP MODE button twice. “WRITE TO
PTV Page 1 of 2
October, 2001
Hitachi America, Ltd., Home Electronics Division National Service
(continued)
Alvie W Rodgers
Page 09-08
Page 2 of 2 PTV 01-10
ROM?” will display on the OSD after the first press of the PIP MODE button. After the second press of the PIP MODE button, the screen will go dark for approximately 20 seconds. When the data has been saved, or ROM WRITE has been completed, green dots will appear on the OSD corresponding to the 13 x 9 crosshatch intersection adjustment points. After the green dots appear, press the MUTE button to return to the DCAM. To initialize the Magic Focus sensors, first press the PIP MODE button once. Again, “WRITE TO ROM?” will display on the OSD. Then press the PIP CH button to start the sensor data position initialization procedure. When this process has completed, you will again see the green dots on the OSD, unless an error has occurred in the initialization procedure, in which case the technician would be presented with an error code in the lower left corner in the OSD corresponding to what the actual error is. Failure to initialize MAGIC FOCUS sensors after saving convergence correction data will result in a STATIC (+) display when MAGIC FOCUS attempts to run. The technician will then be required to access the service only switch behind the front cover to get back into the DCAM to initialize the sensors, since the procedure to access DCAM without removing the front panel, requires MAGIC FOCUS to be running.
8. To exit, press the POWER button on the front panel. PROCEDURE FOR HP13 CHASSIS: 1. Press and hold the MAGIC FOCUS button on the front panel. 2. While the button is held down, the OSD will change from “MAGIC FOCUS” to “CENTER MODE”,
then to “STATIC MODE”. 3. When “STATIC MODE” is displayed on the OSD, press the INPUT or the ANT button on the remote
control. 4. The unit will now be in the DCAM. 5. Press the SWAP button twice to read old ROM data into memory. “READ FROM ROM?” will display
on the OSD after the first press of the SWAP button. 6. Proceed with digital convergence adjustments ONLY if READ FROM ROM did not clear up
convergence error. 7. Remember to save the correction data and initialize the MAGIC FOCUS sensors. To save the correction
data, press the PIP MODE button twice. “WRITE TO ROM?” will display on the OSD after the first press of the PIP MODE button. After the second press of the PIP MODE button, the screen will go dark for approximately 20 seconds. When the data has been saved, or ROM WRITE has been completed, green dots will appear on the OSD corresponding to the 13 x 9 crosshatch intersection adjustment points. After the green dots appear, press the MUTE button to return to the DCAM. To initialize the Magic Focus sensors, first press the PIP MODE button once. Again, “WRITE TO ROM?” will display on the OSD. Then press the PIP CH button to start the sensor data position initialization procedure. When this process has completed, you will again see the green dots on the OSD, unless an error has occurred in the initialization procedure, in which case the technician would be presented with an error code in the lower left corner in the OSD corresponding to what the actual error is. Failure to initialize MAGIC FOCUS sensors after saving convergence correction data will result in a STATIC (+) display when MAGIC FOCUS attempts to run.
8. To exit, press the POWER button on the front panel.
Alvie W Rodgers
Page 09-09
Alvie W Rodgers
MODEL: All Digital Models (2H)
SUBJECT: Convergence & Symmetry Adjustments. Complete Convergence Adjustments. The only time a Screen Jig would be needed is when a new DCU is installed, or if the DCU RAM has been cleared and saved “by accident”. If so, follow S/M instructions very closely, paying special attention to the R and B OFFSET and Horizontal size and position on the I2C bus. Touch Up: All other conditions will be considered “touch up”. In other words, the original reference was never lost. Most times, customers notice one or two areas where the colors are separated, or are not symmetrical, as in the following examples: *NOTE: The values given on these examples are used for reference ONLY.
PTV Page 1 of 1
December, 2001
Hitachi America, Ltd., Home Electronics Division National Service
The Main Problem: When customers complain that they notice a line that is not straight (see both examples given ) generally the convergence is adjusted to make the line white….but it will still be bowed or tilted. This will become more obvious when viewing Widescreen formatted DVD on a 4x3, a menu from a Set Top Box or when displaying a 4x3 format on the 16x 9 screen. To touch it up: Make sure Horizontal Position is correct– check Center before attempting touch up. Turn OFF red and blue, work on GREEN only. Use a straight reference to place on top of the af-fected line. In this case tape a string from side to side using the frame as a measuring reference and adjust the affected line to match the reference. Once the green is straight, turn red on and match to green; then do the same with the blue. A straight reference line may need to be placed on the left, top, bottom, right, etc,...if those areas are affected. Goal: Assure the Green reference is straight and then make sure to place the red and blue on top of the green. Make sure to adjust symmetry as well as convergence. Note 1: If unit has Magic Focus, make sure to save to RAM and then re-initialize Magic Focus sensors – Test Magic Focus before leaving customer’s home. If unit does not have Magic Focus, just save to RAM...DO NOT try to re-initialize Magic Focus sensors. If this is done, unit will display errors….this is normal, because there are no sensors to re-initialize. Note 2: There are TWO Convergence Modes on ALL Digital PTVs – Normal or Progressive and HD or High Definition. Treat each independently of each other, each has a separate memory. Adjust or touch up normal and save, adjust or touch up HD and save to RAM and to MF if applicable. DP-1X has two modes only on 4x3 screens; Normal and V Squeeze or Through Mode (Aspect 5). All DP-1X 16x9 screens have only one mode, regardless of signal being used. Note 3: The HD mode is accessible ONLY when feeding 720p or 1080i from a Set Top Box or a Generator, even if there is no sig-nal present. Just make sure the output of the Set Top Box is set to 1080i. There is no need for an HD source or generator to do a touch up or complete convergence on Normal mode.
4x3Screen
3 in
16x9Screen
3 in
4 in
AffectedAreas
Only top line seems tilted Top is bowing and leftside is not straight.
4 in
Alvie W Rodgers
Page 09-10
February, 2002 Hitachi America Ltd. Home Electronics Division
National Service
MODEL:
53SDX89B, 60SDX88B DP-86 CHASSIS
43FDX01B, 53FDX01B DP-05 CHASSIS
53SDX01B, 61SDX01B DP-06 CHASSIS
53SWX01B, 61SWX01B DP-07 CHASSIS
SUBJECT:
POOR QUALITY PICTURE WHEN DISPLAYING 1H SIGNAL ON 2H PTV
PHENOMENOM:
There have been a number of reports regarding the picture quality of 2H sets while
receiving a 1H signal. Reports have included, but are not limited to, fuzzy picture,
frame lag, picture blurring with motion, etc.
REPLY:
HITACHI Engineering has received, reviewed, and confirmed these reports and
found the symptom to be normal. The reason is the signal sent by the broadcaster is
1H while the set is scanning at 2H. When the TV is receiving a 1H signal, the Flex
Converter circuitry has to artificially generate an extra line for each line received.
These extra lines are not the actual signal, but are re-created line samples from the
internal RAM of the Flex Converter. When the signal changes rapidly, as in fast
zooming, or panning at a high rate, these extra lines are re-created at a fixed rate and
occasionally are not created as rapidly as the signal is changing.
Alvie W Rodgers
Page 09-11
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
Page 09-12
Alvie W Rodgers
NOTES:
Alvie W Rodgers
NOTES:
Related Documents
